[{"_id":"stencil-check-for-use-of-named-slot","title":"StencilJS - Check for Use of Named Slot","subtitle":"","description":"How to determine if a named slot is being used with code in a Stencil web component. ","body":"

\n Within a Stencil web component, you may sometimes need to determine, with code, whether or not a named slot is being used. \n I had this need recently, for example, in a layout component that had to render a unique DOM and use unique CSS class names \n depending on the named slots that were being used. In this post, I'm sharing how to do it. \n

\n\n

You need, first of all, to import the Element decorator within the @stencil/core imports as shown below:

\n\nimport { Component, Element, Host, h} from '@stencil/core';\n\n

Now, you can use the Element decorator within your code to gain access to the host element, like this:

\n\n@Element() host: HTMLElement;\n\n

Declare the slots that you want to check for using private variables:

\n\n\nprivate panelLeftSlot: HTMLElement;\nprivate panelRightSlot: HTMLElement;\n\n\n\n

\n Now, in the componentLoad() lifecycle method, you can attempt to populate the representative slot variables. \n If the user does not inject the named slots when they use your component, the respective variables will simply remain undefined, which you \n can test for.\n

\n\n

componentWillLoad() {\n    this.panelLeftSlot =  this.host.querySelector("[slot='panel-left']")\n    this.panelRightSlot =  this.host.querySelector("[slot='panel-right']")\n}

\n\n

\n To illustrate this in full, let's look at the code for a component that uses the Bootstrap grid system to render a layout. \n The DOM structure and CSS classes are to be rendered differently, depending on the given slots.\n

\n\n

import { Component, Element, Host, h} from '@stencil/core';\n\n@Component({\n    tag: 'glass-layout',\n    shadow: false,\n})\nexport class GlassLayout {\n\n    @Element() host: HTMLElement;\n\n    private panelLeftSlot: HTMLElement;\n    private panelRightSlot: HTMLElement;\n\n    private panelLeftCSS: string;\n    private panelCenterCSS: string;\n    private panelRightCSS: string;\n\n    componentWillLoad() {\n\n        this.panelLeftSlot =  this.host.querySelector("[slot='panel-left']")\n        this.panelRightSlot =  this.host.querySelector("[slot='panel-right']")\n\n        if(this.panelLeftSlot && this.panelRightSlot) {\n            this.panelLeftCSS = 'col-md-3'\n            this.panelCenterCSS = 'col-md-6'\n            this.panelRightCSS = 'col-md-3'\n        } else {\n            this.panelLeftCSS = 'col-md-4'\n            this.panelCenterCSS = 'col-md-8'\n            this.panelRightCSS = 'col-md-4'\n        }\n\n    }\n\n    render() {\n\n        return (\n            <Host>\n                <slot name="header" />\n                <main class="flex-shrink-0">\n                    <div class="container">\n                        {this.panelLeftSlot || this.panelRightSlot\n                        ? \n                            <div class="row">\n                                {this.panelLeftSlot ? <div class={this.panelLeftCSS}><slot name="panel-left" /></div> : []}\n                                <div class={this.panelCenterCSS}><slot/></div>\n                                {this.panelRightSlot ? <div class={this.panelRightCSS}><slot name="panel-right" /></div> : []}\n                            </div>\n                        :\n                            <slot/>\n                        }\n                    </div>\n                </main>\n                <slot name="footer" />\n            </Host>\n        )\n\n    }\n}\n

\n\n

Now, here's an example that uses all of the named slots available...

\n\n

<glass-layout>\n    <div slot="header" style="background-color: red">HEADER</div>\n    <!--\n        START: MAIN CONTENT\n        Main panel is not actually a named slot. Any elements without a named slot will just go in the \n        default, unnamed slot...\n    -->\n    <h1 class="mt-5 display-4">HELLO WORLD!</h1>\n    <p>Paragraph One</p>\n    <p>Paragraph Two</p>\n    <!--\n        END: MAIN CONTENT\n    -->\n    <div slot="panel-left" style="background-color: purple; height:100%">PANEL LEFT</div>\n    <div slot="panel-right" style="background-color: blue; height:100%">PANEL RIGHT</div>\n    <div slot="footer" style="background-color: green">FOOTER</div>\n</glass-layout>\n

\n\n

$\"Stencil$

\n\n

Here's an example that uses only the default unnamed slot and the slot named panel-right. Notice the difference in the rendered result that follows.

\n\n

$\"Stencil$

\n\n

That's it. I hope I saved you some time. Happy coding!

","layoutName":"SidebarRight","path":["blog"],"thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-stencil.svg","ogImage":"","menus":["blog"],"created":"2021-10-09T16:29:02.230Z","features":["syntax highlighter"],"topics":["software-dev"],"modified":"2021-10-11T17:00:48.634Z"},{"_id":"node-script-replace-text-using-counter","title":"Node Script - Replace Text Using Counter","subtitle":"","description":"Node.js script that replaces all instances of a given substring found in a text file with an incrementing number.","body":"

Here's a Node.js script that replaces all instances of a given substring found in a text file with an incrementing number. You can use the node script itself or just steal the technique for use in your own JavaScript code.

\n\n

This script reads a source text file and replaces all instances of a given substring found in the file with a number that is incremented for each instance of the substring replaced. So, take the following string, for example, and suppose that the substring, 000, is what we wish to replace:

\n\n

Hello 000 world 000 nodejs 000 is 000 really 000 useful 000!

\n\n

Given an INCREMENT of 5, the string could become:

\n\n

Hello 5 world 10 nodejs 15 is 20 really 25 useful 30!

\n\n

With a PREFIX value of \"A_\" and suffix value of \"_B\", it could become:

\n\n

Hello A_5_B world A_10_B nodejs A_15_B is A_20_B really A_25_B useful A_30_B !

\n\n

// replaceTextUsingCounter.js\nconst fs = require('fs')\n\nconst SOURCE_FILE = '../my-app/input.json'\nconst DEST_FILE = '../my-app/output.json'\nconst REPLACE_REGEX = /replace-me/g // This defines, in REGEX, the substring to find.\nconst PREFIX = '' // Value will be prefixed to the counter when substring is replaced; use '' for no prefix\nconst SUFFIX = '' // Value will be appended to the counter when substring is replaced; use '' for no suffix\nconst START_COUNT = 0 // The number to start your counter on\nconst INCREMENT = 5; // How much to increment for each substring found\n\n// Read text file for content to perform search and replace operation on...\nconst fileContents = fs.readFileSync(SOURCE_FILE).toString()\n\n// Initialize a counter with a given starting count...\nlet counter = START_COUNT;\n\n// Call string replace function on the content.\n// For each instance of the given search substring found,\n// fire a function that returns what to replace the string segment with...\nconst modifiedContent = fileContents.replace(REPLACE_REGEX, function() {\n    let replacementString = PREFIX + counter + SUFFIX; // the first substring replaced should have starting count\n    counter = counter + INCREMENT; // successive substrings replaced will be incremented\n    return replacementString\n});\n\nfs.writeFile(DEST_FILE, modifiedContent, function (err) {\n    if (err) { return console.log(err); }\n    console.log('COMPLETE! Check destination file: ' + DEST_FILE);\n});

\n\nTo use this script, place it in your project, install the fs dependency with npm install fs --save-dev, update variables in the file as per your need, and then run with node replaceTextUsingCounter.js.","layoutName":"SidebarRight","path":["blog"],"thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-javascript.svg","ogImage":"","menus":["blog"],"created":"2021-10-02T15:24:49.730Z","features":["syntax highlighter"],"modified":"2022-08-27T16:21:04.101Z","topics":["software-dev"]},{"_id":"hcl-dxp-renew-ssl-cert","title":"HCL DX - Renew Your Docker Dev SSL Certificate","subtitle":"","description":"The SSL certificate in your HCL Digital Experience platform on Docker can expire, prohibiting you from completing certain development tasks. Here's how to renew the certificate so you can get back to business.","body":"

When using the official Docker images for developing on the HCL Digital Experience platform (formerly IBM WebSphere Portal), you may encounter issues related to certificate expiration. \n You might notice these errors when attempting to execute a ConfigEngine task, for example. In this post, I'll demonstate the kind of error you're likely to see on the command line and \n then the steps to fix the issue by renewing your SSL certificate in the WebSphere Admin Console.

\n\n

Console Errors

\n\n

Following are two example error stack traces that I produced when trying to execute a ConfigEngine task while the certificate was expired in my local development instance of HCL DXP on Docker.

\n\n

[wplc-discard-wsadmin-session] [2021-09-25 16:18:40.134] CWPKI0312E: The certificate with subject DN CN=localhost, OU=dockerCell, OU=dockerNode, O=IBM, C=US has an end date 4/26/21 11:37 PM which is no longer valid.\n    com.ibm.websphere.management.exception.ConnectorException: ADMC0016E: The system cannot create a SOAP connector to connect to host localhost at port 10033.\n            at com.ibm.websphere.management.AdminClientFactory.createAdminClientPrivileged(AdminClientFactory.java:635)\n            at com.ibm.websphere.management.AdminClientFactory.access$000(AdminClientFactory.java:127)\n            at com.ibm.websphere.management.AdminClientFactory$1.run(AdminClientFactory.java:210)\n            at com.ibm.ws.security.util.AccessController.doPrivileged(AccessController.java:63)\n            at com.ibm.websphere.management.AdminClientFactory.createAdminClient(AdminClientFactory.java:206)\n            at com.ibm.wplc.deploy.tasks.AbstractBaseAdminTask.executeTask(AbstractBaseAdminTask.java:492)\n            at com.ibm.wplc.deploy.tasks.AbstractBaseWsAdminWrapperTask.executeTask(AbstractBaseWsAdminWrapperTask.java:395)\n            at com.ibm.wplc.deploy.tasks.AbstractBaseAdminTask.execute(AbstractBaseAdminTask.java:177)

\n\n

Here's another part of the stack trace. I post these so that web search engines will index these errors so that you might find this solution when searching.

\n\n

Caused by: com.ibm.websphere.management.exception.ConnectorNotAvailableException: [SOAPException: faultCode=SOAP-ENV:Client; msg=Error opening socket: java.io.IOException: Exception during sslSocket.startHandshake: com.ibm.jsse2.util.h: PKIX path validation failed: java.security.cert.CertPathValidatorException: validity check failed; targetException=java.lang.IllegalArgumentException: Error opening socket: java.io.IOException: Exception during sslSocket.startHandshake: com.ibm.jsse2.util.h: PKIX path validation failed: java.security.cert.CertPathValidatorException: validity check failed]\n    at com.ibm.ws.management.connector.soap.SOAPConnectorClient.reconnect(SOAPConnectorClient.java:439)\n    at com.ibm.ws.management.connector.soap.SOAPConnectorClient.(SOAPConnectorClient.java:238)\n    ... 74 more\nCaused by: [SOAPException: faultCode=SOAP-ENV:Client; msg=Error opening socket: java.io.IOException: Exception during sslSocket.startHandshake: com.ibm.jsse2.util.h: PKIX path validation failed: java.security.cert.CertPathValidatorException: validity check failed; targetException=java.lang.IllegalArgumentException: Error opening socket: java.io.IOException: Exception during sslSocket.startHandshake: com.ibm.jsse2.util.h: PKIX path validation failed: java.security.cert.CertPathValidatorException: validity check failed]\n    at org.apache.soap.transport.http.SOAPHTTPConnection.send(SOAPHTTPConnection.java:475)\n    at org.apache.soap.rpc.Call.WASinvoke(Call.java:510)\n    at com.ibm.ws.management.connector.soap.SOAPConnectorClient$4.run(SOAPConnectorClient.java:397)\n    at com.ibm.ws.security.util.AccessController.doPrivileged(AccessController.java:118)\n    at com.ibm.ws.management.connector.soap.SOAPConnectorClient.reconnect(SOAPConnectorClient.java:382)\n    ... 75 more\n/opt/HCL/ConfigEngine/config/includes/default_cfg.xml:143: Unable to create remote administration client:  ADMC0016E: The system cannot create a SOAP connector to connect to host localhost at port 10033.\n    com.ibm.wplc.deploy.tasks.AbstractBaseAdminTask.executeTask(AbstractBaseAdminTask.java:496)\n    com.ibm.wplc.deploy.tasks.AbstractBaseWsAdminWrapperTask.executeTask(AbstractBaseWsAdminWrapperTask.java:395)\n    com.ibm.wplc.deploy.tasks.AbstractBaseAdminTask.execute(AbstractBaseAdminTask.java:177)\n    org.apache.tools.ant.UnknownElement.execute(UnknownElement.java:275)

\n\n

Renewing the SSL Certificate in the WebSphere Application Server

\n\n

The solution is quick and simple. First, I summarize it for you below and then I illustrate the steps with screenshots.

\n\n

Fix Procedure Summary

\n\n

Access the WAS console in your web browser and login (typically at: https://localhost:10041/ibm/console/login.do?action=secure)
Click Security > SSL certificate and key management.
Under Related Items, click Key stores and certificates.
Click the appropriate
to which you want to add the new certificate.\n\t\t
- Note: Only self-signed certificates and chained certificates signed with root certificates from the root keystore can be renewed. This is how the official images from HCL are setup for demos and development, though.
Under Additional Properties, click Personal certificates to list the personal certificates.
Select a personal certificate from the list.
Click the Renew button.
Click Apply then OK.

\n\n

Fix Procedure Illustrated

\n\n

Click Security (1), and SSL certificate and key management (2). Then, under Related Items, click Key stores and certificates(3).

\n\n $\"\"/$ \n\n

Click the appropriate to which you want to add the new certificate (4).

\n\n $\"\"/$ \n\n

Under Additional Properties, click Personal certificates to list the personal certificates (5).

\n\n $\"\"/$ \n\n

Select a personal certificate from the list (6), then click the Renew button (7).

\n\n $\"\"/$ \n\n

Click Apply then OK. Notice that the expiration date on the certificate now shows renewed expiration date. Save the changes directly to the master configuration (8).

\n\n $\"\"/$ \n\n","layoutName":"SidebarRight","path":["blog"],"thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","ogImage":"","menus":["blog"],"created":"2021-09-26T06:00:00.000Z","modified":"2022-02-05T00:55:35.041Z","features":["syntax highlighter"],"topics":["software-dev"]},{"_id":"delete-node-modules-folder-on-windows","title":"How to Delete the node_modules Folder on Windows","description":"Using RimRaf for Node.js, which mimics the UNIX/LINUX command, rm -rf.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-npm.svg","created":"2019-12-31T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

If you attempt to delete the node_modules folder on Windows, you may have trouble for a variety of reasons.\n\t\t In some cases, for example, the folder nesting within the directory creates folder names that are too long.\n\t\t You might also get the annoying Folder Access Denied message stating, "You'll need to provide administrator permission to delete this folder" (shown below).

\n\t\t\n\t\t

The solution I use is to install RimRaf globally with npm and then use it to delete the folder. RimRaf is an implementation of the UNIX/LINUX command rm -rf for Node, which removes directories and their contents recursively. First, enter this command to install RimRaf from npm:

\n\t\t\n\t\tnpm install rimraf -g\n\t\t\n\t\t

Once it is installed, you can use the following command from within the project directory that contains the node_modules folder...

\n\t\t\n\t\trimraf node_modules\n\t\t\n\t\t

That's it! It works and it's easy to remember and execute.

\n","layoutName":"SidebarRight","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"collect-ui-ui-screenshots-to-inspire-design","title":"Collect UI - Screenshots to Inspire Your Next Design","description":"By providing example UI's in a variety of categories, this site can help inspire your website designs.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/2019/02/collectui.com-thumbnail.png","created":"2019-02-18T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

$\"\"$

Here’s a really cool site that provides user interface screenshots (some animated) from which you can draw inspiration (imitate and improve). The site classifies and organizes example UI’s in a variety of helpful categories.

http://collectui.com

","layoutName":"SidebarRight","modified":"2021-05-31T09:35:33.144Z","subtitle":"","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"copy-assets-from-node-modules-in-stencil-js","title":"How to Copy Assets From node_modules in Stencil.js","description":"How to copy assets from the node_modules directory using the copy config in the stencil.config.ts file for Stencil.js.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-stencil.svg","created":"2018-12-13T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-31T09:36:19.655Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

In this post I describe how to copy assets from the node_modules directory using the copy config in the stencil.config.ts file for Stencil.js.

My Stencil project has a dependency on Bootstrap, so in the pages that use my components, I needed to include the following files:

bootstrap.min.css
bootstrap.min.js
jquery.slim.min.js
popper.min.js

First, I added these as dev dependencies using npm. For one example:

npm install boostrap --save-dev

The next goal was to make sure that these assets were copied to the www/assets directory during the build process. Copying resources from one location to another can be achieved with the copy config specified with src and dest in the stencil.config.ts file as shown below.

\n\n

copy: [\n    { src: '../node_modules/bootstrap/dist/css/bootstrap.min.css', dest: 'assets/css/bootstrap.min.css'},\n    { src: '../node_modules/bootstrap/dist/js/bootstrap.min.js', dest: 'assets/js/bootstrap.min.js'},\n    { src: '../node_modules/jquery/dist/jquery.slim.min.js', dest: 'assets/js/jquery.slim.min.js'},\n    { src: '../node_modules/popper.js/dist/popper.min.js', dest: 'assets/js/popper.min.js'}\n]

\n \n

With that configuration, Stencil.js copies the resources to the specified locations within www/assets whenever the build is executed (such as when running npm start.

For more information see: Stencil Config – copy

","layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":"","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"curated-list-of-ibm-digital-experience-resources","title":"Curated List of IBM Digital Experience Resources","description":"A curated list of resources related to the IBM Digital Experience platform","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2018-12-04T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

$\"\"$ Here’s a curated list of resources related to the IBM Digital Experience platform that I’ve started managing with markdown pages in a GitHub repo. If you want to see an expanded view of the product documentation tree or other resources for IBM WebSphere Portal, IBM Web Content Manager, etc., check it out.

https://github.com/codyburleson/ibm-dx-resources

","modified":"2021-05-31T10:48:26.366Z","layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":"","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"a-look-at-sparql-sql-for-semantic-web","title":"A Look at SPARQL - SQL for the Semantic Web","description":"Learn about SPARQL, the query language for Linked Data and the Semantic Web, with example queries for the DBPedia SPARQL endpoint.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2018-10-13T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

$\"\"$ SPARQL is the query language for Linked Data and the Semantic Web. It provides new capabilities\n that you simply cannot get out of traditional SQL and its power to unearth knowledge is amazing. With it,\n you can perform a distributed or federated query across multiple databases with a single query\n statement. Because SPARQL endpoints may exist on the World Wide Web as well as within your corporate\n enterprise, your own data can be augmented and extended by graphs upon graphs of information where as little\n as one single link was made. You can find and explore relationships in your company data, as well as world\n data, that you didn’t even know existed – all without the need for schema knowledge or some brain-numbing\n entity-relationship diagram postered on your wall. SPARQL is just one of a handful of tools that are\n transforming the current Web of documents into tomorrow’s "semantic" Web of linked data. In this\n post, I provide a very light introduction to SPARQL with a few simple queries you can cut your teeth on.

\n\n

RDF and the surprisingly simple, but infinitely powerful triple

\n\n

Linked Data is based on the RDF data model – a model in which simple assertions are made with statements\n called "triples". A triple has a structure like a simple sentence we might have learned about in\n grade-school (e.g. “Jack is a friend of Jill.”). It is comprised of a subject, predicate,\n and object.

\n\n

$\"Subject$

\n\n

Believe it or not, that’s really all we need to describe anything and everything known to man; the known\n universe can be described with triples. OK, if you want to get philosophical about it, we’d need a few\n axiomatic concepts to begin with, but let’s not get philosophical. A triple is all we need to say something\n meaningful…

\n\n

$\"Jack$

\n\n

That’s it. Unless Jill’s pissed-off at Jack, that’s a fact; that’s knowledge. Only, in RDF, it doesn’t really\n look like that. In RDF, triples are expressed with Uniform Resource Identifiers (URIs), which can be\n globally unique on the Web, so it looks more like this…

\n\n

$\"Subject$

\n\n

To make things easier, in RDF we can also use prefixed names for URIs as long as we pre-define the prefix.\n

\n\n

@prefix social: <http://example.org/models/social#>.

\n\n

$\"Subject$

\n\n

The object of a triple may be a URI that refers to a resource, but it can also be a literal\n value – a string, integer, boolean, etc.

\n\n

$\"Subject$ \n

\n\n

Schema-less RDF storage

\n\n

RDF triples are stored in what’s commonly referred to as a triple-store. A triple-store is to SPARQL\n what a relational-database is to SQL. But since all we need to express a triple are three URIs, or two URI’s\n and a literal value, we have no need for a pre-defined schema in order to put new data in. Pause for a\n second and let the gravity of that statement sink in, please. And because we don’t need a pre-defined\n schema, we can store new relationships and new kinds of information about things even though we were unable\n to predict all the possible needs of our application when we first developed it. An application that uses a\n triple-store can therefore be continuously enhanced and extended with absolutely no need for database\n changes and significantly less code changes and deployments.

\n\n

\n
Linked Data applications can significantly reduce application design, development, and integration costs.\n
\n

\n\n

Wikipedia has a pretty good list of vendor\n implementations for triple-store support. Among them, for example, are AlegroGraph, Mulgara, OpenLink Virtuoso, Sesame, Oracle, and IBM\n DB2 (NoSQL Graph).

\n\n

So, if you’re familiar with SQL databases, you might think of all the triples in a triple-store as a flat\n list of three-column records. However, because a triple links one concept with another, and because all the\n triples can be linked to one another, what we really end up with is a graph, which we can enter at\n any point, and bounce around like a cockroach on a hot griddle.

\n\n

$\"A$

\n\n

It is important to note that just because a triple-store does not require a schema, it doesn’t mean that we\n shouldn’t have a general model for the information we’re storing. We’re still storing information about\n certain kinds of things, which have common properties and relationships. We don’t have to standardize on\n those classes and attributes, but if we do, our data is much easier to query and to integrate with data\n conforming to other standard models. The model for a particular domain of knowledge is called\n a vocabulary or an ontology. An ontology defines the classes of things you’re going to be\n storing information about as well as the properties they have and the relationships that can hold among\n them. You can create your own or you can use other, well defined vocabularies available online. It’s always\n a best-practice to use existing vocabularies when they suit your needs, rather than invent your own. You can\n also leverage existing vocabularies, but extend them to better suit the specific needs of your organization.\n

\n\n

SPARQL endpoints

\n\n

The RDF graph within a triple-store is then exposed with a standard interface made accessible on the web,\n called a SPARQL endpoint. A SPARQL endpoint accepts queries and returns results via HTTP. This is a\n machine-friendly interface to a knowledge base; although there is typically also a user interface for\n querying the data. Generic endpoints can query any Web-accessible RDF data\n and specific endpoints are wired to query against particular datasets. So, let’s take a look at a\n specific SPARQL endpoint now that’s very popular.

\n\n

$\"DBPedia$ DBpedia is a crowd-sourced community effort to extract structured\n information from Wikipedia. Because it is exposed as a SPARQL endpoint, we can use it to ask interesting\n questions about the information in Wikipedia. So, let’s get our feet wet, shall we?

\n\n

Point your web browser here: http://dbpedia.org/snorql/, and submit the following query:

\n\n SELECT ?p ?o WHERE {\n <http://dbpedia.org/resource/IBM> ?p ?o .\n} LIMIT 200\n\n

Enter this query for me

\n\n

In this query, we are saying, “Give me all the predicates (?p) and all of the objects (?o) where the URI in the subject is http://dbpedia.org/resource/IBM. Or, in other words, “show me all the properties and values of your resource, IBM.” The results, should look something like this when you select ‘Browse’ for the results format; lots of properties and values…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

An interesting property, to me is dbpedia:ontology/numberOfEmployees. At the time of this writing, the value was 434,246 employees. That seems like a big number, but I’m not entirely sure. Before I say, “wow,” I want to compare with some other companies that I think of as being ‘big’. I can easily just replace the subject in the query with another company, such as the shipping, freight, logistics and supply chain management company, UPS.

\n\nSELECT ?p ?o WHERE {\n <http://dbpedia.org/resource/United_Parcel_Service> ?p ?o .\n} LIMIT 100\n\n

Enter this query for me.

\n\n

How did I know that the subject URI should be /United_Parcel_Service and not /UPS? I performed a quick look at Wikipedia. The URL http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/UPS leads to an informational page about a variety of uses of the acronym, not the company page. From that informational page, however, I found the link to the company and there, I could see how the topic, United_Parcel_Service, was identified in the URL ( i.e. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_Parcel_Service). You can usually take the topic name from a Wikipedia URL and add it to the end of http://dbpedia.org/resource/ to create the DBpedia URI. ¹

\n\n

Of course, I can look at the results and see that UPS has fewer employees than IBM – 398,300 total at the time of this blog post. I could also use a slightly different kind of query to ask the question, “Is IBM bigger than UPS in terms of the total number of employees?” For the next query, you must first switch the results format from ‘Browse’ to ‘as XML’ or ‘as XML + XSLT’.

\n\n

PREFIX ont: <http://dbpedia.org/ontology/>\n\nASK {\n    <http://dbpedia.org/resource/IBM> ont:numberOfEmployees ?ibm .\n    <http://dbpedia.org/resource/United_Parcel_Service> ont:numberOfEmployees ?ups .\n    FILTER(?ibm > ?ups) .\n}

\n\n

Enter this query for me.

\n\n

Here’s a more sophisticated query for all companies that have more than 398300 employees, filtered for English labels only, and ordered by number of employees descending.

\n\n

PREFIX ont: <http://dbpedia.org/ontology/>\n\nSELECT ?company_name ?num_employees\nWHERE {\n    ? company a ont:Company;\n    rdfs:label ?company_name ;\n    ont:numberOfEmployees ?num_employees .\n    FILTER (?num_employees > 398300 && lang(?company_name) = \"en\") .\n} ORDER BY DESC(?num_employees) LIMIT 250

\n\n

Enter this query for me.

\n\n

As you can see, not all of the data is clean because Wikipedia editors have sometimes included the source date in the field where the number of employees was recorded. That’s an issue to be sorted out either with the DBpedia parsing engine or Wikipedia editors. It’s also something to keep in mind about the World Wide Web of linked open data; while it affords us broad access to a lot of valuable information, there are still issues with accuracy, proof, and trust – not too much different than those we’re familiar with in the current “Web of documents”. There is something fundamentally different about linking data than linking documents, however, and I hope that I have at least helped you get a sense of it.

\n\n

SPARQL is one of the key technologies of the "next" Web and though it’s not as popular and well-understood as traditional SQL, it is mature and well-ready to deliver new value to the the modern corporate enterprise.

\n\n

Is that your enterprise? Maybe, it should be.

\n\n

Footnotes:

Bob DuCharme has made this point with very similar words in his excellent O’REILLY®book, Learning SPARQL, Second Ed. He wrote, “If Wikipedia has a page for ‘Some_Topic’ at http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Some_Topic, the DBpedia URI to represent that resource is usually http://dbpedia.org/resource/Some_Topic.

","modified":"2021-05-31T10:50:32.196Z","layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":"","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"fix-for-git-after-macos-mojave-upgrade","title":"Fix for Git After Mac OS Mojave Upgrade","description":"How to fix Git when getting an xcrun error after Mac OS Mojave upgrade.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-apple.svg","created":"2018-10-02T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-31T10:52:02.367Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Recently, I upgraded my macOS to Mojave and ran into the following error after running the git init command.

\n\n

xcrun: error: invalid active developer path (/Library/Developer/CommandLineTools), \nmissing xcrun at: /Library/Developer/CommandLineTools/usr/bin/xcrun

\n\n\t\t

I was able to fix this by running the following command in a terminal…

\n\nxcode-select --install\n\n\t\t

Accept the license and install xcode-select when the associated install prompt window appears. You should then be back in business (at least, I was).

\n","layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":"","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"vs-code-cheat-sheet","title":"VS Code Cheat Sheet","description":"My personal cheat sheet for Microsoft Visual Studio Code (VS Code).","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-vs-code.svg","created":"2018-08-03T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-11-02T16:50:36.530Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

\n $\"VS$ \n This is my personal cheat sheet for Microsoft Visual Studio Code (VS Code).

\n\n

Contents

\n\n

Keyboard shortcuts for Windows

\n\n

General

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Action	Key(s)
Show Command Palette	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + `P`, `F1`
Quick Open, Go to File…	`CTRL` + `P`
New window/instance	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + `N`
Close window/instance	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + `W`
User Settings	`CTRL` + `,`
Keyboard Shortcuts	`CTRL` + `K` `CTRL` + `S`

\n\n

Basic editing

Action	Key(s)
Cut line (empty selection)	`Ctrl` + `X`
Copy line (empty selection)	`Ctrl` + `C`
Move line up/down	`Alt` + `↑` / `↓`
Copy line up/down	`Shift` + `Alt` + `↓` / `↑`
Delete line	`Ctrl` + `Shift` + `K`
Insert line below	`Ctrl` + `Enter`
Insert line above	`Ctrl` + `Shift` + `Enter`
Jump to matching bracket	`Ctrl` + `Shift` + `\\`
Indent/outdent line	`Ctrl` + `]` / `[`
Go to beginning/end of line	`Home` / `End`
Go to beginning of file	`Ctrl` + `Home`
Go to end of file	`Ctrl` + `End`
Scroll line up/down	`Ctrl` + `↑` /
Scroll page up/down	`Alt` + `PgUp` / `PgDn`
Fold (collapse) region	`Ctrl` + `Shift` + `[`
Unfold (uncollapse) region	`Ctrl` + `Shift` + `]`
Fold (collapse) all subregions	`Ctrl` + `K` `Ctrl` + `[`
Unfold (uncollapse) all subregions	`Ctrl` + `K` `Ctrl` + `]`
Fold (collapse) all regions	`Ctrl` + `K` `Ctrl` + `0`
Unfold (uncollapse) all regions	`Ctrl` + `K` `Ctrl` + `J`
Add line comment	`Ctrl` + `K` `Ctrl` + `C`
Remove line comment	`Ctrl` + `K` `Ctrl` + `U`
Toggle line comment	`Ctrl` + `/`
Toggle block comment	`Shift` + `Alt` + `A`
Toggle word wrap	`Alt` + `Z`

\n\n

Navigation

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Action	Key(s)
Show all Symbols	`CTRL` + `T`
Go to Line...	`CTRL` + `G`
Go to File...	`CTRL` + `P`
Go to Symbol...	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + `O`
Show Problems panel	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + `M`
Go to next error or warning	`F8`
Go to previous error or warning	`SHIFT` + `F8`
Navigate editor group history	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + `TAB`
Go back / forward	`ALT` + `←` / `→`
Toggle Tab moves focus	`CTRL` + `M`

\n\n

Search and replace

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Action	Key(s)
Find	`CTRL` + `F`
Replace	`CTRL` + `H`
Find next/previous	`F3` / `SHIFT` + `F3`
Select all occurences of Find match	`ALT` + `ENTER`
Add selection to next Find match	`CTRL` + `D`
Move last selection to next Find match	`CTRL` + K `CTRL` + `D`
Toggle case-sensitive / regex / whole word	`ALT` + `C` / `R` / `W`

\n\n

Multi-cursor and selection

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n\n \n \n \n \n\n \n \n \n \n\n \n \n \n \n \n

Action	Key(s)
Insert cursor	`ALT` + Click
Insert cursor above / below	`CTRL` + `ALT` + `↑` / `↓`
Undo last cursor operation	`CTRL` + `U`
Insert cursor at end of each line selected	`SHIFT` + `ALT` + `I`
Select current line	`CTRL` + `L`
Select all occurrences of current selection	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + `L`
Select all occurrences of current word	`CTRL` + `F2`
Expand selection	`SHIFT` + `ALT` + `→`
Shrink selection	`SHIFT` + `ALT` + `←`
Column (box) selection	`SHIFT` + `ALT` + (drag mouse)
Column (box) selection	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + `ALT` + (arrow key)
Column (box) selection page up/down	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + `ALT` + `PgUp` / `PgDn`

\n\n

Rich languages editing

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Action	Key(s)
Trigger suggestion	`CTRL` + `SPACE`
Trigger parameter hints	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + `SPACE`
Format document	`SHIFT` + `ALT` + `F`
Format selection	`CTRL` + K `CTRL` + `F`
Go to Definition	`F12`
Peek Definition	`ALT` + `F12`
Open Definition to the side	`CTRL` + `K` `F12`
Quick Fix	`CTRL` + `.`
Show References	`SHIFT` + `F12`
Rename Symbol	`F2`
Trim trailing whitespace	`CTRL` + `K` `CTRL` + `X`
Change file language	`CTRL` + `K` `M`

\n\n

Editor management

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Action	Key(s)
Close editor	`CTRL` + `F4`, `CTRL` +
Close folder	`CTRL` + `K` `F`
Split editor	`CTRL` +
Focus into 1st, 2nd or 3rd editor group	`CTRL` + `1` / `2` / `3`
Focus into previous/next editor group	`CTRL` + K `CTRL` + `←` / `→`
Move editor left/right	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + `PgUp` / `PgDn`
Move active editor group	`CTRL` + `K` `←` / `→`

\n\n

File management

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Action	Key(s)
New File	`CTRL` + N
Open File...	`CTRL` + O
Save	`CTRL` + S
Save As...	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + S
Save All	`CTRL` + K S
Close	`CTRL` + F4
Close All	`CTRL` + `K` `CTRL` + `W`
Reopen closed editor	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + T
Enter Keep preview mode editor open	`CTRL` + K
Open next	`CTRL` + Tab
Open previous	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + Tab
Copy path of active file	`CTRL` + K P
Reveal active file in Explorer	`CTRL` + K R
Show active file in new window/instance	`CTRL` + K O

\n\n

Display

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Action	Key(s)
Toggle full screen	F11
Toggle editor layout (horizontal/vertical)	`SHIFT` + `ALT` + 0
Zoom in/out	`CTRL` + = / -
Toggle Sidebar visibility	`CTRL` + B
Show Explorer / Toggle focus	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + E
Show Search	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + F
Show Source Control	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + G
Show Debug	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + D
Show Extensions	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + X
Replace in files	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + H
Toggle Search details	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + J
Show Output panel	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + U
Open Markdown preview	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + V
Open Markdown preview to the side	`CTRL` + K V
Zen Mode (Esc Esc to exit)	`CTRL` + K Z

\n\n

Debug

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Action	Key(s)
Toggle breakpoint	F9
Start/Continue	F5
Stop	`SHIFT` + F5
Step into/out	F11 / `SHIFT` + F11
Step over	F10
Show hover	`CTRL` + K `CTRL` + I

\n\n

Integrated terminal

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Action	Key(s)
Show integrated terminal	`CTRL` + `
Create new terminal	`CTRL` + `SHIFT` + ` \\
Copy selection	`CTRL` + C
Paste into active terminal	`CTRL` + V
Scroll up/down	`CTRL` + ↑ / ↓
Scroll page up/down	`SHIFT` + PgUp / PgDn
Scroll to top/bottom	`CTRL` + Home / End

\n\n

For other operating systems’ keyboard shortcuts and additional information, see Key Bindings for Visual Studio Code.

\n\n\n

Preference settings

\n\n

Following is NOT an exhaustive list of all preference settings that are available. There are more, but these are just the ones I have so\n far found useful.

To access settings, go to File > Preferences > Settings, or press CTRL + ,

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Setting	Description
editor.minimap.enabled	Controls whether the minimap is shown.
editor.renderControlCharacters	Controls whether the editor should render control characters.
editor.renderWhitespace	Controls whether the editor should render whitespace characters.
explorer.compactFolders	Controls whether the explorer should render folders in a compact form. In such a form, single child folders will be compressed in a combined tree element. Useful for Java package structures, for example.
html.autoClosingTags	Enable/disable autoclosing of HTML tags.
javascript.updateImportsOnFileMove.enabled	Enable/disable automatic updating of import paths when you rename or move a file in VS Code. Requires using TypeScript 2.9 or newer in the workspace.
window.zoomLevel	Adjust the zoom level of the window. The original size is 0 and each increment above (e.g. 1) or below (e.g. -1) represents zooming 20% larger or smaller. You can also enter decimals to adjust the zoom level with a finer granularity.
workbench.tree.indent	Controls tree indentation in pixels.
workbench.tree.renderIndentGuides	Controls whether the tree should render indent guides.

\n\n

Extensions

\n\n

Git History - View git log, file history, compare branches or commits.
HTML Tag Wrap - Wraps selected code with HTML tags. Select one or more blocks of text or strings of text that you wish to wrap with an HTML tag. Press Alt + W or Option + W for Mac and type the name of the tag.
MongoDB For VS Code - Connect to MongoDB and Atlas directly from your VS Code environment, navigate your databases and collections, inspect your schema and use playgrounds to prototype queries and aggregations.

\n\n

","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","ogImage":"","subtitle":"","features":["exclude ads","exclude comments","jquery","flip","syntax highlighter"]},{"_id":"setup-carbon-ldp-with-stardog-container-from-scratch","title":"Setup Carbon Ldp With Stardog Container From Scratch","description":"A procedure for setting up Carbon LDP with Stardog as the database.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/carbonldp-logo.png","created":"2018-07-17T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

In this post, I provide a procedure for setting up Carbon LDP with Stardog as the database, from scratch. Further documentation can be found on the product documentation page, Enterprise-class repositories. This procedure will detail how to run both Carbon LDP and Stardog together as two linked Docker containers.

\n\n

Obtain Stardog and license key file

\n\n

To create the Stardog container, you will need the Stardog binary and a license key. Head over to stardog.com and fetch yourself the 30-day Enterprise trial or Community Edition.

\n\n

Setup the Stardog docker container

\n\n

First, we’ll setup the Stardog container. For this, we’ll use Jon Tutcher’s Stardog dockerfile. Use the following command to get Jon’s repo. In my case, I am providing a new name for the local repo (stardog-docker-jontutcher).

\n\n

git clone https://github.com/jontutcher/stardog-docker.git stardog-docker-jontutcher

\n\n

Navigate into the directory and create a resources directory inside of it…

\n\ncd stardog-docker-jontutcher/\nmkdir resources\n\n

Put the Stardog license key file into the resources directory. The file must be named stardog-license-key.bin. You can obtain a license key for the 30 day enterprise trial or community edition at stardog.com. The license key will be picked up from the resources directory and built into the image when we build from the dockerfile.

\n\n

Back out of the resources directory and run the docker build command.

\n\ncd ..\ndocker build --tag stardog:latest .\n\n

Now use the following command to run the container.

\n\n

docker run \\\\\n    -d -p 5820:5820 \\\\\n    --name stardog-instance \\\\\n    -v /Users/cburleson/data/stardog:/stardog \\\\\n    stardog:latest

\n\n

Note that the -v parameter should point to your Stardog data directory on your host machine. If you do not have an existing Stardog data directory, you should create an empty one and refer to that.

\n\n

You can use the following command to verify the container exists and is running:

\n\n

docker ps -a

\n\n

In your web browser, navigate to http://localhost:5820/ to access the Stardog administrative interface. You can login with the default username and password: admin | admin. Alternatively, you can access Stardog through Stardog Studio, a separate download.

\n\n

Create a database in Stardog for Carbon LDP

\n\n

Next, we’ll create a database in the Stardog server for the Carbon platform to use. Through the web interface, you can do this through Databases > New DB. Create a new database with all the default options except for “Database online”, which you should switch to OFF. This will allow us to edit the database configuration directly after creating it. Name the database whatever you want, such as “carbonldp”. In my case, I’m using the name “carbonldp-industrial” for the industrial PoC I’m building.

\n\n

After creating the database, edit it and set Query all graphs to ON, which is necessary for Carbon to function properly.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Now Save the database configuration and turn the database ON.

\n\n

Configure and run the Carbon LDP platform container

\n\n

Spinning up a Carbon LDP platform container requires only one docker command. But first, you need to…

\n\n

Create a persistent volume for Carbon LDP

\n\n

Create a directory on your local machine that can be used as a persistent volume for the Carbon platform container. In my case, I created the following directory, for example:

\n\n

/Users/cburleson/data/carbonldp-industrial

\n\n

Run the Carbon LDP container

\n\n

The prerequisites are set. So, now we can spin up a Carbon server with the following Docker command. Be sure to replace the -v parameter with the path you created for your persistent Carbon directory. Leave everything after the colon in tact (don’t touch the part, :/opt/carbonldp/shared). At the time of this writing, the latest version of Carbon is 1.0.x-alpha. If there is a later version by the time you read this, you can use that. Also be sure to change the name of the carbonldp.repository.id parameter to the name of the database you created for Carbon in the Stardog server. You can name the container whatever you want. It’s typical to call it “carbonldp”, but in my case, I’m running it with the container named “carbonldp-industrial” This allows me to have multiple carbon containers for different purposes. As per my own settings, the full command is as follows:

\n\n

docker run -d --name carbonldp-industrial -p 8083:8083 \\\\\n    -v /Users/cburleson/data/carbonldp-industrial:/opt/carbonldp/shared \\\\\n    --link stardog-instance:stardog-instance carbonldp/carbonldp-platform:1.0.x-alpha \\\\\n    --carbonldp.repository.type=\"stardog\" \\\\\n    --carbonldp.repository.url=\"http://stardog-instance:5820/\" \\\\\n    --carbonldp.repository.username=\"admin\" \\\\\n    --carbonldp.repository.password=\"admin\" \\\\\n    --carbonldp.repository.id=\"carbonldp-industrial\"

\n\n

In order for the two containers to communicate with one another, they are linked with Docker link parameter. The value of that parameter is the container (<name or id>:alias or <name or id>). In my case, stardog-instance:stardog-instance, where stardog-instance is the name of the Stardog container and also referred to in the carbonldp.repository.url value.

\n\n

If the Carbon image is not yet present on your machine, it will be fetched by the command from Docker Hub. You can execute the following Docker command to verify that the container is up and running.

\n\n

docker ps -a

\n\n

Is the STATUS is Exited, there was a problem in the startup. If you see such a problem, you can run the following command to examine the logs for troubleshooting:

\n\n

docker logs <container-name>

\n\n

Or, in my case…

\n\n

docker logs carbonldp-industrial

\n\n

If Carbon started up successfully, its logs should resemble the following:

\n\n

├┬---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------┤\n ¦ Platform: v1.0.0-alpha.13 (Build: 2018-04-12T16:39:27+0000)\n ¦\n ¦ https://carbonldp.com\n└┴---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------┘\n\nINFO  [                         c.c.Application] -- Starting Application v1.0.0-alpha.13 on 6a8195e0e2e2 with PID 7 (/opt/carbonldp/carbonldp-platform.jar started by root in /)\nDEBUG [                         c.c.Application] -- Running with Spring Boot v2.0.1.RELEASE, Spring v5.0.5.RELEASE\nINFO  [                         c.c.Application] -- The following profiles are active: default\nDEBUG [c.c.r.t.TxnConfig$$EnhancerBySpringCGLIB$$5dca10a3] -- Connecting with configured Stardog repository...\nDEBUG [c.c.r.t.TxnConfig$$EnhancerBySpringCGLIB$$5dca10a3] -- Connecting with configured Stardog repository...DONE\nDEBUG [                     c.c.l.LockingConfig] -- Starting embedded ZooKeeper server...\nDEBUG [                     c.c.l.LockingConfig] -- Starting embedded ZooKeeper server...COMPLETE\nDEBUG [   c.c.s.a.t.JWTokenAuthenticationFilter] -- Initializing filter 'jwTokenAuthenticationFilter'\nDEBUG [   c.c.s.a.t.JWTokenAuthenticationFilter] -- Filter 'jwTokenAuthenticationFilter' configured successfully\nDEBUG [ c.c.s.a.a.AnonymousAuthenticationFilter] -- Initializing filter 'anonymousAuthenticationFilter'\nDEBUG [ c.c.s.a.a.AnonymousAuthenticationFilter] -- Filter 'anonymousAuthenticationFilter' configured successfully\nINFO  [                         c.c.Application] -- Started Application in 11.816 seconds (JVM running for 13.061)

\n\n

Verify Carbon data in the Stardog server

\n\n

For an additional validation, you can verify that the database in Stardog has some preliminary Carbon-specific data in it. In the Stardog web console at http://localhost:5820/, navigate to the database you created for Carbon, click on >_ Query and run the following SPARQL query for Types:

\n\nselect distinct ?type ?label \nwhere { \n ?s a ?type . \n OPTIONAL { ?type rdfs:label ?label } \n}\n\n\t\t

You should see Carbon-specific types in the results as shown below…

\n\t\t\n\t\t

$\"\"$

\n\t\t\n\t\t

Verify Carbon response in web browser

\n\t\t\n\t\t

You can also do a check for a response from the Carbon server by hitting the following URL in your web browser:

\n\t\t\n\t\t

http://localhost:8083/.system/platform/

\n\t\t\n\t\t

The browser should return an RDF response similar to the following (the platform meta, which includes the build date and version):

\n\n

<rdf:RDF xmlns:rdf="http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#">\n  <rdf:Description rdf:about="http://localhost:8083/.system/platform/">\n    <rdf:type rdf:resource="http://www.w3.org/ns/ldp#Container"/>\n    <rdf:type rdf:resource="https://carbonldp.com/ns/v1/platform#RequiredSystemDocument"/>\n    <rdf:type rdf:resource="http://www.w3.org/ns/ldp#RDFSource"/>\n    <rdf:type rdf:resource="http://www.w3.org/ns/ldp#BasicContainer"/>\n    <rdf:type rdf:resource="http://www.w3.org/ns/ldp#Resource"/>\n    <rdf:type rdf:resource="https://carbonldp.com/ns/v1/platform#Document"/>\n    <rdf:type rdf:resource="https://carbonldp.com/ns/v1/platform#Platform"/>\n    <membershipResource xmlns="http://www.w3.org/ns/ldp#" rdf:resource="http://localhost:8083/.system/platform/"/>\n    <modified xmlns="https://carbonldp.com/ns/v1/platform#" rdf:datatype="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema#dateTime">2018-07-17T20:06:25.656Z</modified>\n    <created xmlns="https://carbonldp.com/ns/v1/platform#" rdf:datatype="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema#dateTime">2018-07-17T20:06:25.656Z</created>\n  </rdf:Description>\n  <rdf:Description rdf:nodeID="node1ciktjenqx53">\n    <rdf:type rdf:resource="https://carbonldp.com/ns/v1/platform#PlatformInstance"/>\n    <rdf:type rdf:resource="https://carbonldp.com/ns/v1/platform#VolatileResource"/>\n    <buildDate xmlns="https://carbonldp.com/ns/v1/platform#" rdf:datatype="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema#dateTime">2018-04-12T16:39:27.000Z</buildDate>\n    <version xmlns="https://carbonldp.com/ns/v1/platform#">1.0.0-alpha.13</version>\n  </rdf:Description>\n    <rdf:Description rdf:about="http://localhost:8083/.system/platform/">\n    <instance xmlns="https://carbonldp.com/ns/v1/platform#" rdf:nodeID="node1ciktjenqx53"/>\n  </rdf:Description>\n</rdf:RDF>

\n\n

You’re good to go! You may, however, wish to use the Carbon LDP Workbench as well.

\n\n

Run the Carbon LDP Workbench

\n\n

The Carbon LDP Workbench provides a visual interface to your Carbon instance data. You can spin up the workbench with the following command:

\n\n

docker run -d --name carbonldp-workbench -p 8000:80 \\\\\n    -e \"CARBON_HOST=localhost:8083\" \\\\\n    -e \"CARBON_PROTOCOL=http\" \\\\\n    carbonldp/carbonldp-workbench:1.0.x-alpha

\n\n

You can then access the Workbench at the following URL:

\n\n

http://localhost:8000/

\n\n

If you see any errors in the Workbench when first accessing it, try a hard refresh in your browser.

\n\n

Accessing the Stardog container’s shell

\n\n

If you want to get into the Stardog container to execute stardog-admin commands, use the following Docker command:

\n\n

docker exec -it <stardog-container-name> bash

\n\n

In my case:

\n\n

docker exec -it stardog-instance bash

\n\n

Then you can change into the stardog/bin directory…

\n\n

cd /stardog/bin

\n\n

And execute stardog-admin commands, such as…

\n\n

./stardog-admin help

\n\n

You can type exit to exit out of the container and back to your host shell.

\n\n

Accessing the Carbon LDP container’s shell

\n\n

If you want to get into the Carbon LDP container, you can use a similar command. However, the Carbon container does not include bash, so you can use sh instead…

\n\n

docker exec -it <carbon-container-name> sh

\n\n

You can type exit to exit out of the container and back to your host shell.

\n\n

Conclusion

\n\n

This post described the procedure for setting up a Carbon LDP container configured to run with a Stardog database in a Stardog container. Additionally, we setup the Carbon LDP Workbench. And finally, I showed how you can get inside the Stardog container to execute stardog-admin commands. The procedure results in three Docker containers providing everything you need for Carbon LDP with Stardog development environment.

\n","modified":"2021-06-01T04:45:25.890Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"javascript-ternary-operator-shortcut-to-the-if-statement","title":"JavaScript Ternary Operator - Shortcut to the If Statement","description":"This shortcut to the IF statement is something every JavaScript developer should know.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-javascript.svg","created":"2018-01-17T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

The conditional (ternary) operator is the only JavaScript operator that takes three operands and it is frequently used as a shortcut for the if statement.

\n\n

// If isMember (first argument) evaluates to true, return "$2:00" (first expression),\n// else return "$10.00" (second expression)\nfunction getFee(isMember) {\n  return (isMember ? "$2.00" : "$10.00");\n}\n\n// Another example\n// var foo = (a === b) ? 1 : 2;\nvar foo = (a === b)\n  ? 1\n  : 2;

\n\n\t\t

See also: Conditional (ternary) Operator, MDN web docs

\n","modified":"2021-05-07T18:05:02.404Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"sparql-examples-list-classes","title":"SPARQL Examples – List Classes","description":"Example SPARQL queries that can help you list the classes in an ontology.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2017-12-19T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-07T18:05:55.151Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Example SPARQL queries that can help you list the classes in an ontology.

List all classes

\n\nPREFIX rdf: <http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#>\n \nSELECT DISTINCT ?type\nWHERE {\n ?s a ?type.\n}\n\n

Note: The SPARQL keyword a is a shortcut for the common predicate rdf:type, giving the class of a resource.

\n\n

List root classes

\n\n

SELECT ?directSub ?super\n WHERE { ?directSub rdfs:subClassOf ?super .\n         FILTER NOT EXISTS {\n            ?directSub rdfs:subClassOf ?otherSub .\n            FILTER (?otherSub != ?directSub)\n         }\n}

\n\n

List all classes with a given prefix

\n\n

PREFIX bc: <http://base22.com/ont/bc#>\n \nSELECT DISTINCT ?type\nWHERE {\n  ?subject a ?type.\n  FILTER( STRSTARTS(STR(?type),str(bc:)) )\n}

\n\n

List class hierarchy

\n\n

PREFIX owl: <http://www.w3.org/2002/07/owl#>\nPREFIX rdfs: <http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#>\n \nSELECT DISTINCT ?subject ?label ?supertype\nWHERE {\n    { ?subject a owl:Class . } UNION { ?individual a ?subject . } .\n    OPTIONAL { ?subject rdfs:subClassOf ?supertype } .\n    OPTIONAL { ?subject rdfs:label ?label }\n} ORDER BY ?subject

\n\n

Note that when a reasoner is enabled classes may typically be inferred to be rdfs:subClassOf themselves and rdfs:subClassOf any parent class, not just the direct parent.

\n\n

List class hierarchy – filtered

\n\n

Give a class hierarchy, but filter out several structural elements so that we only end up with the unique classes in our ontology.

\n\n

PREFIX owl: <http://www.w3.org/2002/07/owl#>\nPREFIX rdf: <http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#>\nPREFIX rdfs: <http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#>\nSELECT DISTINCT ?subject ?label ?supertype\nWHERE {\n    { ?subject a owl:Class . } UNION { ?individual a ?subject . } .\n    OPTIONAL { ?subject rdfs:subClassOf ?supertype } .\n    OPTIONAL { ?subject rdfs:label ?label }.\n    FILTER (?subject != owl:Class &&\n        ?subject != rdf:List &&\n        ?subject != rdf:Property &&\n        ?subject != rdfs:Class &&\n        ?subject != rdfs:Datatype &&\n        ?subject != rdfs:ContainerMembershipProperty &&\n        ?subject != owl:DatatypeProperty &&\n        ?subject != owl:NamedIndividual &&\n        ?subject != owl:Ontology )\n} ORDER BY ?subject

\n\n

Note that when a reasoner is enabled classes may typically be inferred to be rdfs:subClassOf themselves and rdfs:subClassOf any parent class, not just the direct parent.

\n\n

List class hierarchy with direct subclasses only

\n\n

This is similar to the query above, but uses the Sesame-specific sesame:directSubClassOf to get only direct subclasses. This would work in any RDF4J (formerly Sesame) system such as Graph DB.

\n\n

PREFIX owl: <http://www.w3.org/2002/07/owl#>\nPREFIX rdf: <http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#>\nPREFIX rdfs: <http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#>\nPREFIX : <https://codyburleson.com/hyperg/>\n \nSELECT DISTINCT ?subject ?label ?supertype\nWHERE {\n    {\n        ?subject a owl:Class .\n        OPTIONAL { ?subject sesame:directSubClassOf ?supertype } .\n        OPTIONAL { ?subject rdfs:label ?label }.\n    }\n           \n          FILTER (?subject != owl:Class &&\n            ?subject != rdf:List &&\n            ?subject != rdf:Property &&\n            ?subject != rdfs:Class &&\n            ?subject != rdfs:Datatype &&\n            ?subject != rdfs:ContainerMembershipProperty &&\n            ?subject != owl:DatatypeProperty &&\n            ?subject != owl:NamedIndividual &&\n            ?subject != owl:Ontology &&\n            ?subject != ?supertype)\n} ORDER BY ?subject

","layoutName":"SidebarRight","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"sparql-examples-construct","title":"SPARQL Examples – Construct","description":"Example SPARQL queries that can help you list the classes in an ontology.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2017-12-19T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-06-01T04:52:45.086Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Construct a graph giving ontology structure (the class hierarchy, properties, domains and ranges)

\n\n\t\tCONSTRUCT { ?s ?p ?o . } \nWHERE { VALUES ?p { rdfs:subClassOf rdfs:subPropertyOf rdfs:domain rdfs:range} ?s ?p ?o }\n\n\n\t\t

Note that when a reasoner is enabled classes may typically be inferred to be rdfs:subClassOf\n\t\t\tthemselves and rdfs:subClassOf any parent class, not just the direct parent.

","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"sparql-examples-select","title":"SPARQL Examples – Select","description":"Various examples for using SELECT in SPARQL queries.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2017-12-17T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-07T18:06:39.292Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Find all triples

\n\n

Use SELECT to signify you want to select certain information and WHERE to signify your conditions, restrictions, and filters. A LIMIT is used to avoid cracking the server on a large dataset.

\n\nSELECT ?subject ?predicate ?object\nWHERE {?subject ?predicate ?object} \nLIMIT 100\n\n

Find all same-subject triples by given subject

\n\n

By specifying only the subject in the pattern, we can return all triples that have that subject. When an individual entity is defined by a given subject URI, then this is a way to get all the properties for that entity.

\n\n

PREFIX rdfs: <http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#>\nPREFIX rdf: <http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#>\nSELECT ?subject ?predicate ?object\nWHERE {\n    <http://codyburleson.com/hyperg/person/cody-burleson> ?predicate ?object .\n} LIMIT 100

\n\n

Since the subject is known, you could also omit ?subject from the SELECT line so that only the predicates and objects are returned.

\n\n

Find and order most used predicates

\n\n

SELECT ?predicate (COUNT(*)AS ?frequency)\nWHERE {?subject ?predicate ?object}\nGROUP BY ?predicate\nORDER BY DESC(?frequency)\nLIMIT 10

\n\n

Select the top 100 nodes in the RDF graph

\n\n

RDF Rank is a GraphDB extension. It is similar to Page Rank and it identifies “important” nodes in an RDF graph based on their interconnectedness. It is accessed using the rank:hasRDFRank system predicate.

\n\n

PREFIX rank:<http://www.ontotext.com/owlim/RDFRank#>\nSELECT ?n\nWHERE {?n rank:hasRDFRank ?r }\nORDER BY DESC(?r)\nLIMIT 100

\n\n

Find anything with a label

\n\n

The following query will find all triples where subject and object are joined by rdfs:label. In other words, anything that has been defined as having a label.

\n\n

PREFIX rdfs: <http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#>\nSELECT ?subject ?label\nWHERE { ?subject rdfs:label ?label } LIMIT 100

\n\n

Find instances by class with a label

\n\n

The following example query will get the labels of anything of the class type (rdf:type) Organization.

\n\n

PREFIX rdfs: <http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#>\nPREFIX rdf: <http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#>\nSELECT ?subject ?label\nWHERE {\n    ?subject rdf:type <http://codyburleson.com/hyperg#Organization> .\n    ?subject rdfs:label ?label\n} LIMIT 100

\n\n

Find all subjects with a given object property

\n\n

PREFIX rdfs: <http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#>\nPREFIX bc: <http://www.base22.com/ontologies/2010/5/bc.owl#>\nSELECT ?subject\nWHERE { ?subject bc:hasEmployer <http://www.base22.com/ontologies/2010/5/my-contacts.owl#IBM> } LIMIT 100

\n\n

From my contacts ontology, I find all IBMers (i.e. the hasEmployer predicate points to the individual IBM, which is an object of type Organization).

\n\n

Find all classes

\n\nPREFIX rdf: <http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#>\n \n SELECT DISTINCT ?type\n WHERE {\n ?s a ?type.\n }\n\n

The SPARQL keyword a is a shortcut for the common predicate rdf:type, giving the class of a resource.

\n\n

Find all classes with a given prefix

\n\n

PREFIX bc: <http://base22.com/ont/bc#>\n \n SELECT DISTINCT ?type\n WHERE {\n     ?subject a ?type.\n     FILTER( STRSTARTS(STR(?type),str(bc:)) )\n }

\n\n

The SPARQL keyword a is a shortcut for the common predicate rdf:type, giving the class of a resource.

\n\n

Query from a particular graph on the web

\n\n

PREFIX foaf: <http://xmlns.com/foaf/0.1/>\nPREFIX card: <http://www.w3.org/People/Berners-Lee/card#>\nSELECT ?homepage\nFROM <http://www.w3.org/People/Berners-Lee/card>\nWHERE {\n    card:i foaf:knows ?known .\n    ?known foaf:homepage ?homepage .\n}

\n\n

The FROM keyword lets us specify the target graph in the query itself.
Of interest also in the query shown above:
By using ?known as an object of one triple and the subject of another, we traverse multiple links in the graph.

\n\n

Find subjects with a property value greater than

\n\n

Find me all landlocked countries with a population greater than 15 million

\n\n

PREFIX rdfs: <http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#>\nPREFIX type: <http://dbpedia.org/class/yago/>\nPREFIX prop: <http://dbpedia.org/property/>\nSELECT ?country_name ?population\nWHERE {\n    ?country a type:LandlockedCountries ;\n    rdfs:label ?country_name ;\n    prop:populationEstimate ?population .\n    FILTER (?population > 15000000) .\n}

\n\n

You can try this one at the DBPedia SPARQL endpoint.

FILTER constraints use boolean conditions to filter out unwanted query results.
Shortcut: a semicolon (;) can be used to separate two triple patterns that share the same subject. (?country is the shared subject above.)
rdfs:label is a common predicate for giving a human-friendly label to a resource.

","layoutName":"SidebarRight","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"respond-to-button-click-with-observable","title":"Respond to a Button Click With an Observable","description":"A recipe for responding to a button click with an RxJS Observable.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-javascript.svg","created":"2017-12-03T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-07T18:07:12.905Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

A recipe for responding to a button click with an RxJS Observable.

HTML

\n\n<script src="https://unpkg.com/@reactivex/rxjs@5.3.0/dist/global/Rx.js"></script>\n<button>Click me</button>\n\n

JavaScript

\n\n

var button = document.querySelector('button');\nRx.Observable.fromEvent(button, 'click').\n    subscribe(\n        (value) => console.log(value.clientX) // just for example, log the x position of the cursor\n    );

\n \n

The observable is created by the operator, fromEvent, which takes an “element” and an event name as parameters. It will listens for events of that name (i.e. 'click') taking place on that element. It returns an Observable that emits those events. An “element” may be a simple DOM element, or a NodeList, jQuery element, Zepto Element, Angular element, Ember.js element, or EventEmitter. This operator also takes an optional third parameter: a function that accepts the arguments from the event handler as parameters and returns an item to be emitted by the resulting Observable in place of the event.

Alternative importing

If you're using a JavaScript modules approach (such as with TypeScript), you could do something like the following instead of using the <script> element for importing as shown above.

\n\n

import { Observable } from 'rxjs/Observable';\nimport 'rxjs/add/operator/map';\nimport 'rxjs/add/observable/of';\n// import 'rxjs/add/operator/switchMap';\n// etc., etc...\n// or, you could just more conventiently grab the whole package, but this may not be efficient without Tree Shaking, so I'd recommend the approach above\n// import 'rxjs/Rx';

\n\n

Creating your own observer

Alternatively, you could create your on observer to listen to the click event. Since RxJS provides the fromEvent operator, this is unnecessary. However, showing how this could be done provides a good example of how to create your own observers without use of the RxJS operators.

JavaScript

\n\n

var button = document.querySelector('button');\nvar observer = {\n    next: function(value) {\n        console.log(value.clientX);\n    }\n    // In reality, the error and complete functions below would never be\n    // called for a button click event, but this shows the basic structure\n    // of an Observable; generally implementing the three functions: next, error, and complete...\n    error: function (error) {\n        console.log(error);\n    }\n    complete: function() {\n        console.log('Completed');\n    }\n};\nRx.Observable.fromEvent(button, 'click').\n    subscribe(observer);

\n \n

References

\n\n \t

\n \t\n

","layoutName":"SidebarRight","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"liferay-7-ubuntu-developer-vm-setup-log","title":"Liferay 7 Ubuntu Developer VM Setup Log","description":"My notes on how I setup a Liferay development environment using Ubuntu and VMWare Fusion.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-liferay.svg","created":"2017-10-24T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

This page provides a log of how I setup a Liferay development environment using Ubuntu and VMWare Fusion. The idea is to be able to develop for Liferay CE and Liferay DXP although only the CE portion is fully setup so far, with the DXP portion standing by for potential completion in the case of a customer project. I like to snapshot my VMs frequently so that I can roll back at any point, so you will see indicators everywhere that I’ve taken a snapshot.

This also includes an acid-test, which is itself a mini-tutorial on how to create a RESTful web service endpoint in Liferay.

\n\n

Create an Ubuntu virtual machine

\n\n

Download Ubuntu 16.04.3 LTS Desktop ISO:
\n https://www.ubuntu.com/download/desktop
Install using the easy install (drag and drop the ISO after selecting new in VMWare Fusion)
\n $\"\"$
\n Password is: dev
On this next screen, do not click FINISH!
\n $\"\"$
\n Instead, click Customize Settings
Save the VM as “Ubuntu 64-bit Server 16.04.3” (default file name for the VM)
In the virtual machine settings:\n
- Processors: 2 Processor Cores
- Memory 4000 MB
- Disk size: 60 GB (but not pre-allocated); leave split into multiple files checked
\n
Start up the VM
Reinstall VMWare Tools using the instructions for installing here:
\n https://kb.vmware.com/selfservice/microsites/search.do?language=en_US&cmd=displayKC&externalId=1022525
\n RESTART
SNAPSHOT: CLEAN INSTALL W VMWARE TOOLS

\n\n

Update Ubuntu

\n\n

developer@ubuntu:~$ sudo su -\n[sudo] password for developer:\nroot@ubuntu:~# dev <-password\nroot@ubuntu:~# apt-get update && apt-get upgrade

\n\n

SNAPSHOT: UBUNTU UPDATE & UPGRADE

\n\n

Install Java

\n\n

Note by the following command that Java is not installed…

\n\n

developer@ubuntu:~$ java -version\nThe program 'java' can be found in the following packages:\n * default-jre\n * gcj-5-jre-headless\n * openjdk-8-jre-headless\n * gcj-4.8-jre-headless\n * gcj-4.9-jre-headless\n * openjdk-9-jre-headless\nTry: sudo apt install <selected package>\ndeveloper@ubuntu:~$

\n\n

Change to root…

\n\n

sudo su -\n(enter password)\napt-get install software-properties-common\nadd-apt-repository ppa:webupd8team/java\napt-get update\napt-get install oracle-java8-installer

\n\n

Check if Java is successfully installed

\n\n

java -version\njava version \"1.8.0_111\"\nJava(TM) SE Runtime Environment (build 1.8.0_111-b14)\nJava HotSpot(TM) 64-Bit Server VM (build 25.111-b14, mixed mode)

\n\n

Fix for network service discovery disabled

\n\n

I got this on a startup.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Fix

\n\n

It looks like avahi-daemon is started when the network connection is established (/etc/network/if-up.d/avahi-daemon). This notification is informing you that mDNS (Avahi) has been disabled. It’s only used for a small number of applications that only work on the local network, it won’t adversely affect your internet connection or DNS.

\n\n

The most well known use for mDNS is sharing music with Rhythmbox (or iTunes) over your LAN. It’s an Apple technology, but it’s largely been ignored in favour of uPNP or DLNA.

\n\n

To disable it, you must edit the file /etc/default/avahi-daemon as root:

\n\nsudo -i\ngedit /etc/default/avahi-daemon\n\n

and add this line (or change it if already exists to):

\n\n

AVAHI_DAEMON_DETECT_LOCAL=0

\n\n

Source: http://ubuntuforums.org/showthread.php?t=1632952

\n\n

Fix for colord-sane crash on startup

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Fix

\n\n sudo apt-get remove sane-utils\nsudo apt-get remove colord\n\n

Worked for me, 16.04 running XFCE, but i’ve no need for color profiles.

\n\n

https://bugs.launchpad.net/ubuntu/+source/sane-backends/+bug/1351286

\n\n

SNAPSHOT: STARTUP ERRORS FIXED

\n\n

Install MySQL 5.6

\n\n

You’ll need MySQL 5.6 for the latest version of Liferay (at this point in time).

\n\n\n

sudo add-apt-repository 'deb http://archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu trusty universe'\nsudo apt-get update\nsudo apt install mysql-server-5.6\nsudo apt install mysql-client-5.6

\n\n

MySQL root credentials

\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

user	root
password	fruityrooty22

\n\n

SNAPSHOT: MYSQL 5.6 SERVER AND CLIENT

\n\n

Start the MySQL server and enable the service on system boot

\n\n

Once the MySQL installation is completed, start the MySQL server and enable the service on system boot:

\n\n\nsudo su -\nsystemctl restart mysql\nsystemctl enable mysql\n\n

SNAPSHOT: ENABLE MYSQL ON BOOT

\n\n

Install MySQL Workbench

\n\n

Install MySQL Workbench using the APT package manager:

\n\nsudo apt install mysql-workbench\n\n

Run MySQL Workbench

\n\n

Launch MySQL Workbench from the terminal:

\n\nmysql-workbench\n\n

To view more launch options from the command line interface, use the --help option:

\n\n/usr/bin/mysql-workbench --help\n\n

SNAPSHOT: MYSQL WORKBENCH

\n\n

Secure the MySQL installation

\n\nsudo su -\nmysql_secure_installation\n\n

SNAPSHOT: SECURE MYSQL INSTALLATION

\n\n

Download Liferay assets

\n\n

Download Liferay Portal CE from the site using the Firefox browser in the virtual machine.
Alsxo download the latest Liferay IDE for Linux (64bit)

\n\n

Now, we have both in our Downloads directory. This is what we’ll need to setup a basic Liferay Portal CE dev environment. Note that in the future, I want to also be able to do Liferay DXP development on the same system. Thus, I’ll name things using “CE” versus “DXP” to distinguish.

\n\n

Download Liferay DXP from Customer Portal
Download Liferay Developer Studio from Customer Portal
You DO NOT need to download Liferay Workspace as it is within Liferay Developer Studio

\n\n

To simplify subsequent steps, I renamed my downloads as follows:

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

SNASPSHOT: LIFERAY ASSETS DOWNLOADED

\n\n

Unzip and move Liferay CE

\n\n

In a terminal…

\n\ncd ~\ncd Downloads\nunzip liferay-ce.zip\nsudo mv liferay-ce-portal-7.0-ga4/ /opt/liferay-ce\n\n

Notice that during the move operation, the directory was renamed to simpley “liferay-ce”.

\n\n

Next, we’ll do a similar procedure for Liferay DXP.

\n\n

Unzip and Move Liferay DXP

\n\n

In a terminal…

\n\ncd ~\ncd Downloads\nunzip liferay-dxp.zip\nsudo mv liferay-dxp-digital-enterprise-7.0-sp4/ /opt/liferay-dxp\n\n

Notice that during the move operation, the directory was renamed to simpley “liferay-ce”.

\n\n

Delete Liferay CE and DXP Zips

\n\n

Now we can delete the original archive files to clean up and free some space…

\n\ncd ~\ncd Downloads\nrm -rf liferay-ce.zip\nrm -rf liferay-dxp.zip\n\n

SNAPSHOT: LIFERAY CE AND DXP IN PLACE

\n\n

Create MySQL databases for Liferay

\n\n

Since I am setting up my dev to support both liferay-ce and liferay-dxp, I’ll create two databases, on for each instance.

\n\n

Run the ‘mysql‘ command as a MySQL super user. The default user is ‘root’ with a blank password.

\n\n mysql -h localhost -u root -pfruityrooty22\n\n

Create an empty Liferay database schema by running this command:

\n\n

CREATE DATABASE liferayce CHARACTER SET utf8 COLLATE utf8_bin;\nCREATE DATABASE liferaydxp CHARACTER SET utf8 COLLATE utf8_bin;

\n\n

Create the Liferay database user by running this command. Replace ‘liferayuser’ and ‘liferaypass’ with a username and password of your choice. If Liferay is not running on the same server as your MySQL database server, replace ‘localhost’ with the hostname or IP address of the Liferay server.

\n\n

GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON liferayce.* TO 'liferay_db_user'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'liferay_db_user22';\nGRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON liferaydxp.* TO 'liferay_db_user'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'liferay_db_user22';

\n\n

liferay_db_user credentials

\n\n

…for both lifreayce and liferaydxp databases…

\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

User	\n `liferay_db_user`\n
Password	\n `liferay_db_user22`\n

\n\n

Enter quit to exit out of mysql.

\n\n

If you want, you can execute the following command to fire up the MySQL Workbench to verify:

\n\n mysql-workbench\n\n

You should see the following…

\n\n

(click to enlarge…)

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

SNAPSHOT: EMPTY LIFERAY DBS CREATED

\n\n

Create portal-ext.properties files

\n\n

Create the following two portal-ext.properties files and place them in their respective Liferay home directories.

\n\n

portal-ext.properties for liferay-ce

\n\n

#\n# MySQL\n#\njdbc.default.driverClassName=com.mysql.jdbc.Driver\njdbc.default.url=jdbc:mysql://localhost/liferayce?useUnicode=true&characterEncoding=UTF-8&useFastDateParsing=false\njdbc.default.username=liferay_db_user\njdbc.default.password=liferay_db_user22

\n\n

portal-ext.properties for liferay-dxp

\n\n

#\n# MySQL\n#\njdbc.default.driverClassName=com.mysql.jdbc.Driver\njdbc.default.url=jdbc:mysql://localhost/liferaydxp?useUnicode=true&characterEncoding=UTF-8&useFastDateParsing=false\njdbc.default.username=liferay_db_user\njdbc.default.password=liferay_db_user22

\n\n

Note:

\n\n

You can find the default portal.properties file inside of…

\n\n

tomcat/webapps/ROOT/WEB-INF/lib/portal-impl.jar

\n\n

That can be used as a reference (has lots of nice comments in it; but you’ll never edit that directly – you just override properties within it)

\n\n

SNAPSHOT: PORTAL-EXT.PROPERTIES CREATED

\n\n

I corrected the above files AFTER creating this snapshot, so the values shown above are what they SHOULD be for this snapshot. If you go back to this snapshot for some reason or use any between this one up to and including BUMP TOMCAT, you need to revise the files above as shown above.

\n\n

Remove Libre Office from the VM

\n\n

This is a developer VM; we don’t need it.

\n\nsudo apt-get remove --purge libreoffice*\nsudo apt-get clean\nsudo apt-get autoremove\n\n

SNAPSHOT: LIBREOFFICE* REMOVED

\n\n

Increase Tomcat memory settings

\n\n

In each Liferay home directory, navigate into the tomcat/bin directory and edit the setenv.sh file. You want to change

\n\n Xmx2048m -XX:MaxPermSize=1024m\n\n

It should look something like this after you change it…

\n\n

setenv.sh

\n\n

CATALINA_OPTS=\"$CATALINA_OPTS -Dfile.encoding=UTF8 -Djava.net.preferIPv4Stack=true  -Dorg.apache.catalina.loader.WebappClassLoader.ENABLE_CLEAR_REFERENCES=false -Duser.timezone=GMT -Xmx2048m -XX:MaxPermSize=1024m\"

\n\n

BUMP TOMCAT MEM

\n\n

Start Liferay CE and complete configuration

\n\n/opt/liferay-ce/tomcat-8.0.32/bin/startup.sh\ntail -f /opt/liferay-ce/tomcat-8.0.32/logs/catalina.out\n\n

The application may take some time to be fully started; that’s why we follow the log file for details.

\n\n

After it starts, at localhost:8080, keep all the defaults in the configuration, uncheck Add Sample Data and then click Finish Configuration…

\n\n

(click to enlarge…)

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Then you will see:

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Now, we should shut down this portal and do the same for the liferay-dxp instance.

\n\n/opt/liferay-ce/tomcat-8.0.32/bin/shutdown.sh\ntail -f /opt/liferay-ce/tomcat-8.0.32/logs/catalina.out\n\n

Again, now, you must start the liferay instance. Answer YES to the Terms agreement in the web browser and enter a new password. For the new poassword, I just entered “test” again.

\n\n

Liferay admin user credentials

\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

user	test@liferay.com
password	dev

\n\n

CE 7.0 GA4 CONFIGURED AND RUNNING

\n\n

Install Liferay IDE

\n\n

Extract the liferay-ide.tar.gz

\n\n

Use drag-and-drop to move the resulting “eclipse” folder from Downloads to Home.

\n\n

Start up eclipse from that directory and choose the following default workspace:

\n\n

/home/developer/workspace-ce

\n\n

Remove Ubuntu apps

\n\n

Who has time for games?

\n\n

sudo apt remove aisleriot gnome-mahjongg gnome-mines gnome-sudoku\nsudo apt remove account-plugin-facebook account-plugin-flickr

\n\n

Also while we’re at it, go to Ubuntu Software > Installed and remove:

\n\n

Thunderbird Mail
Cheese (a camera app)
Rhythmbox
Simple Scan
Shotwell
Screen Reader

\n\n

SNAPSHOT: LIFERAY IDE INSTALLED

\n\n

Create a new Liferay Workspace Project

\n\n

Create a new Liferay Workspace Project named ce-work

\n\n

(do not choose to Download liferay bundle)

\n\n

Note (OPTIONAL)

\n\n

We will use the existing liferay-ce bundle outside of the workspace (/opt/liferay-ce). But if you wanted to use a bundle within the workspace, after the project is created, in the Gradle Tasks view execute Bundle > initBundle

\n\n

When that’s done running, refresh the workspace in the IDE and you’ll see the bundle…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Modify the gradle.properties file. Uncomment and change the liferay.workspace.home.dir as shown below. This is what the gradle deploy tasks will use when executing deploy.

\n\nliferay.workspace.home.dir=/opt/liferay-ce\n\n

Modify the bundles > config > local > portal-ext.properties so that it points to your local database as so…

\n\n

#\n# MySQL\n#\n\njdbc.default.driverClassName=com.mysql.jdbc.Driver\njdbc.default.url=jdbc:mysql://localhost/liferayce?useUnicode=true&characterEncoding=UTF-8&useFastDateParsing=false\njdbc.default.username=liferay_db_user\njdbc.default.password=liferay_db_user22

\n\n

Also, edit gradle.properties and uncomment the following line so that the local config is what is used:

\n\nliferay.workspace.environment=local\n\n

Later, you can change that line for another configuration.

\n\n

DON’T FORGET TO DO A GRADLE REFRESH AFTER YOU SAVE! Right-click the file and select Gradle > Refresh Gradle Project

\n\n

Edit the tomcat / bin / setenv.sh in the bundles of the workspace and bump the tomcat memory 2048, 1024 as described earlier.

\n\n

At this point you follow the instructions for Connect to existing Liferay CE from within the workspace (only pointing to the internal bundle) and then…

\n\n

For safety, we’ll modify the portal-ext.properties file for this newly created server to point to our local ce database also…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

So, at this point, we have a liferay-ce bundle in /opt and we now have another one inside the Liferay workspace. Both should be pointing to our local ce database.

\n\n

Again, however, we need to keep the defaults in the web browser configuration and accept the License, but Add Create Sample Data!

\n\n

And then, again, restart the portal (this time, from within the IDE).

\n\n

After creating the Liferay Project Workspace, you should see:

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Connect to existing Liferay CE from within the workspace

\n\n

Next, we’ll connect to the bundle by creating a new server so we can stop and start and watch the logs within the IDE…

\n\n

Connect to the Liferay Server…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Stop the liferay-ce server by command line (if one is started), so we can restart it from within the IDE.

\n\n

After the server is created, double-click to open it in the Editor.

\n\n

In the Liferay Account section, make sure you enter the username and password for the Liferay administrative user and save the server file.

Now you can start the server from within the IDE…

\n\n

SNAPSHOT: LIFERAY IDE SETUP

\n\n

Quick acid test – create and deploy a RESTful web service

\n\n

Now, we should be able to test this setup. To do so, we’ll create an OSGI module, a simple REST web service, and deploy it using Gradle deploy.

\n\n

Right-click on the ce-work node (the Liferay Workspace Project node) and select New > Liferay Module Project
Enter project name ‘rest’ and select Project Template Name: rest as shown below…
\n $\"\"$
I am naming my class and package as shown below…
\n $\"\"$
Click Finish
The resulting module project should look like this:
\n $\"\"$
In the Gradle Tasks view, under the Rest > build nodes and double-click build to execute the Gradle build for this module. You should get a BUILD SUCCESSFUL message in the console.
In the Gradle Tasks view, under the Rest > build nodes, double-click the deploy task. Wait for the console to show you that the module was started.
Note that you can also right-click on the server and select to open the gogo shell:
\n $\"\"$
In the gogo shell, type lb and hit enter. You should see there at the bottom, the OSGI module as Active…
\n $\"\"$
Now point your browser to http://localhost:8080/o/rest/greetings and you should see that it works!
\n $\"\"$

\n\n

SNAPSHOT: REST ACID-TEST MODULE CREATED

\n\n

Conclusion

\n\n

This log has demonstrated the steps that I have used to build a developer’s virtual machine (VMWare Fusion for Mac, in my case – although it should also be fine on VMWare for Windows). At this point, you’ve got enough to do some development with Liferay CE using the Liferay IDE.

\n\n

Potential future step A – complete the configuration for Liferay DXP

\n\n

This step will be very much like the CE step above, but we’ll wait on it as I intend to explore the CE stuff and the Liferay IDE before getting into any of the DXP stuff. When it comes to the DXP, I’ll simply pick up here and do similar steps as what was done for CE above – adding in the license file for DXP as an additional deploy step.

\n\n

Potential future step B – Setup for building Liferay from source code

\n\n

In a future step, I’d also like to set this environment up also for building Liferay from source code.

\n\n

Potential future step C – Setup for developing with IntelliJ

\n\n

I’d also like to experiment with using IntelliJ instead of an Eclipse-based IDE.

\n\n

References

\n\n

","modified":"2021-05-07T18:09:06.697Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"install-oracle-java-8-on-ubuntu","title":"Install Oracle Java 8 on Ubuntu","description":"How to install Oracle Java 8 on Ubuntu (in may case, Ubuntu 16.04 LTS)","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-ubuntu.svg","created":"2017-10-24T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

How to install Oracle Java 8 on Ubuntu (in my case, Ubuntu 16.04 LTS)

\n\n

Procedure to install Oracle Java 8 on Ubuntu

\n\n

You probably want to confirm first that a version of Java is not already installed. If so, you can do that with the java -version command as shown below…

\n\n

developer@ubuntu:~$ java -version\nThe program 'java' can be found in the following packages:\n * default-jre\n * gcj-5-jre-headless\n * openjdk-8-jre-headless\n * gcj-4.8-jre-headless\n * gcj-4.9-jre-headless\n * openjdk-9-jre-headless\nTry: sudo apt install \ndeveloper@ubuntu:~$

\n\n

Change to root…

\n\n

sudo su -\n(enter password)\napt-get install software-properties-common\nadd-apt-repository ppa:webupd8team/java\napt-get update\napt-get install oracle-java8-installer

\n\n

Check if Java is successfully installed

\n\n

java -version\njava version \"1.8.0_111\"\nJava(TM) SE Runtime Environment (build 1.8.0_111-b14)\nJava HotSpot(TM) 64-Bit Server VM (build 25.111-b14, mixed mode)

\n\n

Procedure to uninstall

\n\n

If, for some reason, you want to undo this operation and uninstall Oracle Java 8 from Ubuntu, you can then execute the following:

\n\nsudo su -\nsudo apt-get remove oracle-java8-installer","modified":"2021-05-07T18:09:44.077Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"docker-cheat-sheet","title":"Docker Cheat Sheet","description":"Cheat sheet of commonly used docker commands.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-docker.svg","created":"2017-10-20T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-12-21T03:38:17.609Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

My cheat sheet of commonly used docker commands.

\n\n

List all containers

\ndocker ps --all\n

or...

\ndocker ps -a\n

Remove all containers and images

Here are the two Docker commands you can run in sequence to completely remove (delete) all of your containers and images.

To remove all containers:

\ndocker rm $(docker ps -a -q)\n

To remove all images:

\ndocker rmi $(docker images -q)\n

Warning: Executing the commands shown above will destroy all your containers and images; it will not be possible to restore them.

List images

\ndocker images\n

Remove an image

\ndocker rmi <image-id>\n

Warning: Executing the commands shown above will destroy the given image; it will not be possible to restore it.

Container shell access

The docker exec command allows you to run commands inside a Docker container. The following command line will give you a bash shell inside your container:

\ndocker exec -it <container-name> bash\n

If the container does not have bash installed you can use the following as an alternative:

\ndocker exec -it <container-name> sh\n

For container shell access with root privileges, you can run the following command:

\ndocker exec -ti -u root <container-name> bash\n

Type exit to exit out of the container and return to your host shell.

List ports

The port command can be used to display the ports that are exposed by a given container.

\ndocker port <container-name>\n

List processes

To see the processes running in a container, you can use the top command (similar to running the Linux top command):

\ndocker top <container-name>\n

View container log file

\ndocker logs <container-name>\n

Follow container log file

\ndocker logs --follow <container-name>\n

or...

\ndocker logs -f <container-name>\n

Restart a running container

\ndocker restart\n

Stop all running containers

\ndocker stop $(docker ps -a -q)\n

Inspect container information

\ndocker inspect <container-name-or-id>\n

This returns verbose information about the container in JSON format.

You can zero in on a particular attribute using the f parameter. The following, for example, will print only the Mounts section of the container information that would otherwise be found in the whole JSON print.

\ndocker inspect -f '{{ .Mounts }}' <container-name-or-id>","path":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","ogImage":"","subtitle":""},{"_id":"sparql-examples-ask","title":"SPARQL Examples – Ask","description":"SPARQL query examples using 'ASK'.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2017-08-31T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-07T18:12:41.875Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Is the Amazon river longer than the Nile river?

\n\n\t\t

You can also try this one against DBPedia…

\n\n

PREFIX prop: <http://dbpedia.org/property/>\nASK\n{\n<http://dbpedia.org/resource/Amazon_River> prop:length ?amazon .\n<http://dbpedia.org/resource/Nile> prop:length ?nile .\nFILTER(?amazon > ?nile) .\n}

\n\n\t\t

The answer is: false.

\n\n\t\t

Note: The WHERE keyword is optional–not only in ASK queries but in all SPARQL queries.

\n\n\t\t

Does a triple with the given subject URI exist?

\n\nASK { <http://example.org/carbon/ldp/main/people> ?p ?o> }\n\n\t\t

Returns true or false.

\n\n\t\t

Does Fred have grandchildren?

\n\nPREFIX: <http://bedrock/> \nASK \nWHERE { :fred :hasChild :?child . :?child :hasChild :?grandchild. }\n\n\t\t

Where :fred has any child, see if that child has any child identified by the placeholder, :?child, then use the value of that placeholder to ask whether or not that child itself also has a child, which will be the :?grandchild.

\n","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"sparql-examples-insert","title":"SPARQL Examples – Insert","description":"Example use of INSERT to add data with SPARQL.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2017-08-31T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-07T18:15:16.045Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Insert some statements

\n\n

PREFIX <http://bedrock/>\nINSERT DATA {\n    :fred :hasSpouse :wilma .\n    :fred :hasChild :pebbles .\n    :wilma :hasChild :pebbles .\n    :pebbles :hasSpouse :bamm-bamm ;\n        :hasChild :roxy, :chip.\n}

\n\n\t\t\t\t

Insert data into a named graph

\n\n

INSERT DATA\n{\n     GRAPH <http://example.org/myGraph> \n     {\n          <http://example.org/subject> <http://example.org/predicate> <http://example.org/object>\n     }\n}\n

\n\n

Inserts into a specific Graph. You can insert as many Triples as you want within a single command (only one is used in the example for brevity)

","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"rdf-syntax-examples","title":"RDF Syntax Examples","description":"One RDF example in seven different serialization formats.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2017-08-31T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

RDF can be expressed in a variety of different serialization formats. It can also be used inline with HTML. Following is an example of the most widely used of these formats so that you can compare them at a glance.

\n\n

RDF/XML

\n\n

An XML-based syntax for RDF graphs that was the first standard format for serializing RDF.

\n\n

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>\n<rdf:RDF\n  xmlns:rdf="http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#"\n  xmlns:gr="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#">\n  <gr:Location rdf:about="http://www.acme.com/#store">\n    <gr:name>Hepp's Happy Burger Restaurant</gr:name>\n    <gr:hasOpeningHoursSpecification>\n      <gr:OpeningHoursSpecification>\n        <gr:opens>08:00:00</gr:opens>\n        <gr:closes>20:00:00</gr:closes>\n        <gr:hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek rdf:resource="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Wednesday"/>\n        <gr:hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek rdf:resource="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Monday"/>\n        <gr:hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek rdf:resource="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Tuesday"/>\n        <gr:hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek rdf:resource="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Thursday"/>\n        <gr:hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek rdf:resource="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Friday"/>\n      </gr:OpeningHoursSpecification>\n    </gr:hasOpeningHoursSpecification>\n  </gr:Location>\n</rdf:RDF>

\n\n

Turtle

\n\n

A compact, human-friendly format.

\n\n

@prefix gr: <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#> .\n \n <http://www.acme.com/#store>\n   a gr:Location ;\n   gr:name "Hepp's Happy Burger Restaurant" ;\n   gr:hasOpeningHoursSpecification [\n     a gr:OpeningHoursSpecification ;\n     gr:opens "08:00:00" ;\n     gr:closes "20:00:00" ;\n     gr:hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek gr:Wednesday, gr:Monday, gr:Tuesday, gr:Thursday, gr:Friday\n   ] .

\n\n

N-Triples

\n\n

A very simple, easy-to-parse, line-based format that is not as compact as Turtle.

\n\n

<http://www.acme.com/#store> <http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#type> <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Location> .\n<http://www.acme.com/#store> <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#hasOpeningHoursSpecification> _:b0 .\n<http://www.acme.com/#store> <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#name> "Hepp's Happy Burger Restaurant" .\n_:b0 <http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#type> <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#OpeningHoursSpecification> .\n_:b0 <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#opens> "08:00:00" .\n_:b0 <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#closes> "20:00:00" .\n_:b0 <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek> <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Wednesday> .\n_:b0 <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek> <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Thursday> .\n_:b0 <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek> <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Friday> .\n_:b0 <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek> <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Tuesday> .\n_:b0 <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek> <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Monday> .

\n\n

N3 (or Notation3)

\n\n

A non-standard serialization that is very similar to Turtle, but has some additional features, such as the ability to define inference rules.

\n\n

@prefix gr: <http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#> .\n \n <http://www.acme.com/#store> a gr:Location;\n     gr:hasOpeningHoursSpecification [ a gr:OpeningHoursSpecification;\n             gr:opens "08:00:00";\n             gr:closes "20:00:00";\n             gr:hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek gr:Friday,\n                 gr:Monday,\n                 gr:Thursday,\n                 gr:Tuesday,\n                 gr:Wednesday ];\n     gr:name "Hepp's Happy Burger Restaurant" .

\n\n

JSON-LD

\n\n

a JSON-based serialization (for Linked Data).

\n\n

{\n  "@context": {\n    "gr": "http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#"\n  },\n  "@id": "http://www.acme.com/#store",\n  "@type": "gr:Location",\n  "gr:hasOpeningHoursSpecification": {\n    "@type": "gr:OpeningHoursSpecification",\n    "gr:closes": "20:00:00",\n    "gr:hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek": [\n      {\n        "@id": "gr:Thursday"\n      },\n      {\n        "@id": "gr:Wednesday"\n      },\n      {\n        "@id": "gr:Friday"\n      },\n      {\n        "@id": "gr:Monday"\n      },\n      {\n        "@id": "gr:Tuesday"\n      }\n    ],\n    "gr:opens": "08:00:00"\n  },\n  "gr:name": "Hepp's Happy Burger Restaurant"\n}

\n\n

RDFa

\n\n

Not really an RDF syntax, but rather – a compatible format. “RDFa is an extension to HTML5 that helps you markup things like People, Places, Events, Recipes and Reviews. Search Engines and Web Services use this markup to generate better search listings and give you better visibility on the Web, so that people can find your website more easily.” – rdfa.info

\n\n

<div xmlns:rdf="http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#"\n     xmlns:rdfs="http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#"\n     xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"\n     xmlns:gr="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#">\n   <div about="http://www.acme.com/#store" typeof="gr:Location">\n      <div rel="gr:hasOpeningHoursSpecification">\n         <div typeof="gr:OpeningHoursSpecification">\n            <div property="gr:closes" content="20:00:00"/>\n            <div rel="gr:hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek"\n                 resource="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Thursday"/>\n            <div rel="gr:hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek"\n                 resource="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Tuesday"/>\n            <div rel="gr:hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek"\n                 resource="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Monday"/>\n            <div rel="gr:hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek"\n                 resource="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Friday"/>\n            <div rel="gr:hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek"\n                 resource="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Wednesday"/>\n            <div property="gr:opens" content="08:00:00"/>\n         </div>\n      </div>\n      <div property="gr:name" content="Hepp's Happy Burger Restaurant"/>\n   </div>\n</div>

\n\n

Microdata

\n\n

Also not really an RDF syntax, but a compatible format. This mechanism allows machine-readable data to be embedded in HTML documents in an easy-to-write manner, with an unambiguous parsing model.

\n\n

<div itemscope itemtype="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Location" itemid="http://www.acme.com/#store">\n  <span itemprop="name">Hepp's Happy Burger Restaurant</span>\n  <div itemprop="hasOpeningHoursSpecification" itemscope\n       itemtype="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#OpeningHoursSpecification">\nOpening hours: Mo-Fri,\n     <link itemprop="hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek"\n           href="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Monday" />\n     <link itemprop="hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek"\n           href="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Tuesday" />\n     <link itemprop="hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek"\n           href="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Wednesday" />\n     <link itemprop="hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek"\n           href="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Thursday" />\n     <link itemprop="hasOpeningHoursDayOfWeek"\n           href="http://purl.org/goodrelations/v1#Friday" />\n     <meta itemprop="opens" content="08:00:00">8:00 a.m. -\n     <meta itemprop="closes" content="20:00:00">8:00 p.m.\n  </div>\n</div>

\n\n

RDF Converter Services Online

\n\n

There’s a few decent RDF converter services that you can use online:

\n\n

","modified":"2021-05-07T18:13:53.881Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"sparql-examples-date-range","title":"SPARQL Examples – Date Range","description":"An example SPARQL query for resources within a given date range.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2017-08-31T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-07T18:18:52.922Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

An example SPARQL query filtering for resources within a given date range (between two given dates).

\n\n

PREFIX c: <https://carbonldp.com/ns/v1/platform#>\n \nSELECT ?document ?createdDate WHERE {\n    ?document c:created ?createdDate\n    FILTER (?createdDate < "2017-04-18T22:29:33.667Z"^^xsd:dateTime && ?createdDate > "2017-04-18T21:37:37.708Z"^^xsd:dateTime)\n} LIMIT 100

","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"sparql-examples-filter","title":"SPARQL Examples – Filter","description":"Example use of FILTER in SPARQL queries.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2017-08-31T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-07T18:19:22.962Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Return items with recorded date less than given date

\n\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\n

PREFIX dcterms: <http://purl.org/dc/terms/>\nPREFIX xsd: <http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema#>\nPREFIX web: <http://base22.com/ont/web#>\n \nSELECT * WHERE {\n    ?subject dcterms:title ?title.\n    ?subject dcterms:abstract ?abstract.\n    ?subject web:publishDate ?publishDate.\n    FILTER (?publishDate < "2016-09-28T19:19:02.982Z"^^xsd:dateTime)\n}

","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"sparql-examples-limit","title":"SPARQL Examples – Limit","description":"Example use of the LIMIT keyword in SPARQL.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2017-08-31T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-06-23T14:48:52.383Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Limit the number of results returned

\n\n

PREFIX rdfs:<http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#>\nPREFIX bc: <http://www.base22.com/ontologies/2010/5/bc.owl#>\n\nSELECT *\nWHERE {\n  ?subject bc:hasEmployer <http://www.base22.com/ontologies/2010/5/my-contacts.owl#IBM> .\n           ?subject bc:hasBusinessEmail ?email .\n} LIMIT 5

\n\n\t\t\t\t\t\t\t

The LIMIT keyword is used after the WHERE clause, followed by a numerical value. In this case, of course, only 5 results are returned.

\n\t\t\t\t\t\t\t

LIMIT is a solution modifier that limits the number of rows returned from a query. SPARQL has two other solution modifiers:\n\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t
- ORDER BY for sorting query solutions on the value of one or more variables
- OFFSET, used in conjunction with LIMIT and ORDER BY to take a slice of a sorted solution set (e.g. for paging)
\n\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t

\n","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","ogImage":"","subtitle":""},{"_id":"sparql-examples-paging","title":"SPARQL Examples – Paging","description":"An example SPARQL query for retrieving one given page of results.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2017-08-31T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-06-18T15:55:03.208Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Retrieve the second page of names and emails of people in Tim Berners-Lee’s FOAF file, given that each page has 10 people. Try this on ARQ.

\n\n

PREFIX foaf:<http://xmlns.com/foaf/0.1/>\n\nSELECT ?name ?email FROM <http://www.w3.org/People/Berners-Lee/card>\nWHERE {\n    {SELECT DISTINCT ?person ?name WHERE {\n        ?person foaf:name ?name\n        } ORDER BY ?name LIMIT 10 OFFSET 10 }\n    OPTIONAL { ?person foaf:mbox ?email }\n}

\n","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","ogImage":"","subtitle":""},{"_id":"sparql-examples-count-all-statements","title":"SPARQL Examples – Count All Statements","description":"SPARQL query that counts all statements (triples) in a repository.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2017-08-31T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-07T18:18:18.826Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Here’s a SPARQL query that counts all statements (triples) in a repository.

\n\n\t\tSELECT (COUNT(?s) AS ?triples) WHERE { ?s ?p ?o }\n\t\t\n\n\t\t

Note that this can be a long running query. For me it took took 21 seconds to count the statements in a\n\t\t\trepository with 30 million triples.

\n","layoutName":"SidebarRight","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"sparql-examples-order-by","title":"SPARQL Examples – Order By","description":"Example use of ORDER BY in SPARQL","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2017-08-31T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-06-03T18:26:17.451Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Order by the highest population
\n\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\tHere’s a similar query for DBPedia – this time, ordered by highest population first and filtered by language (“en”).

\n\n

PREFIX type: <http://dbpedia.org/class/yago/>\nPREFIX prop: <http://dbpedia.org/property/>\nSELECT ?country_name ?population\nWHERE {\n    ?country a type:LandlockedCountries ;\n             rdfs:label ?country_name ;\n             prop:populationEstimate ?population .\n    FILTER (?population > 15000000 && langMatches(lang(?country_name), "en")) .\n} ORDER BY DESC(?population)

\n","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"sparql-examples-federation","title":"SPARQL Examples – Federation","description":"Federate data from 2 endpoints with SPARQL.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2017-08-31T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-07T18:14:33.486Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Federate data from 2 endpoints

\n\t\t

Find the birth dates of all of the actors in Star Trek: The Motion Picture.
\n\t\t\tTry this on ARQ.

\n\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\n

PREFIX movie: <http://data.linkedmdb.org/resource/movie/>\nPREFIX dbpedia: <http://dbpedia.org/ontology/>\nPREFIX foaf: <http://xmlns.com/foaf/0.1/>\nSELECT ?actor_name ?birth_date\nFROM <http://www.w3.org/People/Berners-Lee/card> # placeholder graph\nWHERE {\n  SERVICE <http://data.linkedmdb.org/sparql> {\n    <http://data.linkedmdb.org/resource/film/675> movie:actor ?actor .\n    ?actor movie:actor_name ?actor_name\n  }\n  SERVICE <http://dbpedia.org/sparql> {\n    ?actor2 a dbpedia:Actor ; foaf:name ?actor_name_en ; dbpedia:birthDate ?birth_date .\n    FILTER(STR(?actor_name_en) = ?actor_name)\n  }\n}

\n\t\t\t\t\t\t\t

The SERVICE keyword is used to send part of a query against a remote SPARQL endpoint.

\n","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"sparql-examples-negation","title":"SPARQL Examples – Negation","description":"Example negation in SPARQL with the MINUS keyword.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2017-08-31T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-07T18:16:15.640Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Find the person entries in Tim Berners-Lee’s FOAF file that do not contain a URL for the person’s FOAF file. Try this on ARQ.

\n\n

PREFIX foaf: <http://xmlns.com/foaf/0.1/>\nPREFIX rdfs: <http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#>\n\nSELECT ?name\nFROM <http://www.w3.org/People/Berners-Lee/card>\nWHERE {\n  ?person a foaf:Person ; foaf:name ?name .\n  MINUS { ?person rdfs:seeAlso ?url }\n}

\n","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"show-item-namesin-ibm-wcm-authoring","title":"Show Item Names Instead of Display Titles in the IBM WCM Authoring UI","description":"By default, the Display title, rather than the Name is displayed for items in the authoring UI for IBM Web Content Manager (WCM). Here's how to see the name instead.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2017-07-13T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

By default, the Display title, rather than the Name is displayed for items in the authoring UI for IBM Web\n Content Manager (WCM). It may be desirable to see the name instead. This can give authors the ability to use\n special naming conventions, acronyms, or codes in item names while still keeping a user friendly Display\n name for end-users and the search engine. If you’d like to switch the default configuration for your\n authors, here’s how…

In the WebSphere Integrated Solutions Console (the WAS or deployment manager console), navigate to\n Resources > Resource Environment Providers > WCM WCMConfigService.
Under Additional Properties, click on the link to go to the Custom properties.
Click New… to add a new property to the list.
For the Name of the property, enter wcm.authoringui.use.name.as.browser.display.value and\n for the value enter true. The type of the property should remain set on\n java.lang.String.

\n $\"\"$
Click OK.
In the message that says you can Save or Review changes, click the link to Review changes before saving\n or discarding. This will allow you to select to Synchronize changes with Nodes in one step rather than\n saving the changes and then later synchronizing.
Click the check box to Synchronize changes with Nodes and click the Save button.
You’ll need to restart the servers for the change to take effect. In a clustered environment, you can do\n this from the Deployment Manager by navigating to Servers > Clusters > WebSphere application\n server clusters, select the PortalCluster and then click the Ripplestart button. Ripplestart stops and\n then starts each server in the cluster in turn, which can help ensure that one member of the cluster\n stays up for use at all times.

\n\n

If your authors prefer it, now you know! At Base22, we like to say that one happy author makes a thousand\n happy users. To help ensure a positive end-user experience, pay careful attention to the author experience.\n

\n","modified":"2021-06-22T03:11:15.210Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","ogImage":"","subtitle":""},{"_id":"how-to-use-wcm-categories-from-query-parameter-for-pzn","title":"How to Use WCM Categories From Query Parameter for Personalization","description":"A procedure for personalizing IBM Web Content Manager content with URL query parameters.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2017-07-13T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

$\"WebSphere$ Here’s how to use query parameters from the HTPP request (or from the URL) in a personalization component. This page came from my raw notes and hasn’t yet been rewritten for the broader audience; sorry. Posting it anyway for those who won’t mind a little sloppiness.

\n\n

The personalization component must be rendered by the WCM servlet (the URL of which you can get from Previewing the component – DONT FORGET TO REMOVE NO CACHE PARAMS IN PROD). If you access it as rendered within the Web Content Viewer, the rule will not have access to the Request and won’t be able to get the request parameters.

\n\n

Assuming the following taxonomy and categories…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

And assuming the following content…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

We’re going to create the following PZN rule…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

We created 3 request parameters so that we can enforce a rule that insists that all 3 must be on the content (AND). With this, we can add the following to the URL:

\n\n

&cat1=testcat1&cat2=testcat2&cat3=testcat3

\n\n

We could alternatively have only 1 request param and do something like this:

\n\n

&cats=testcat1,testcat2,testcat3

\n\n

The problem with that is that it will only enforce an OR evaluation. If any content is tagged with any one of the given categories, it will show up.

\n\n

Because we need to ensure that only content tagged with all 3 categories shows up, we create 3 separate request params. This allows us to use the PZN rule to enforce the AND condition.

\n\n

Here’s how you make establish the request parameters and make them available in the pzn rule.

\n\n

Step one: Click the value slot…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Step two: Navigate to Manage Properties… under the Request item…

\n\n

When you’re just starting, you list may be empty (mine has some examples in it already).

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Step Three: Click Add Dynamic Property…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Step four: Fill out as follows…for example…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Click SAVE.

\n\n

Click DONE.

\n\n

Your new item should show in the list under Request…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Preview the PZN Component. Remove the unecessary params (like no chache) from the URL for PROD. Add your parameters and category names to the URL. For example:

\n\n

http://local.base22.com:10039/wps/wcm/myconnect/web%20content/articles?source=library&srv=cmpnt&cmpntid=0d99a109-b8c7-4f38-a9ae-8d48faf37e32&cat1=testcat1&cat2=testcat2&cat3=testcat3

\n\n

And you get:

\n\n

$\"\"$

","modified":"2021-05-07T18:20:18.360Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"intellij-idea-cheat-sheet","title":"IntelliJ IDEA Cheat Sheet","description":"My personal cheat sheet for IntelliJ.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-intellij.svg","created":"2017-06-22T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":" \n

Keyboard shortcuts and various tips for IntelliJ IDEA. This document assumes IntelliJ on a Mac, using the Keymap setting for Mac OS X 10.5+ (in Preferences > Keymap). I know you can get all these through Help > Keymap Reference in IntelliJ, but I like to maintain my own list so that I can organize and search it the way I prefer, plus have a place to add my own additional notes.

\n\n

Editing

\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Comment / uncomment selected text	Select block of text and then press `CMD` + `/`
Spread selection from cursor (to word, then line, etc.)	ALT + up arrow or down arrow
Format selected code	CTRL + ALT + I
Format all code	ALT + CMD + L
Autocomplete method parameter info	CMD + P (when cursor is in method signature)
Invoke a Surround Template (ex: surround a line with try/catch)	OPTION + CMD + T
Complete a statement	SHIFT + CMD + ENTER
Import Java Package	Hover over the red text of the class missing a package and press: ALT + ENTER

\n\n

Live Templates

\n\n

Live templates can be found in Preferences > Editor > Live Templates. Learn them! To use a live template, enter its short text in the editor and then press tab to replace the short text with its template.

\n\n

Navigation

\n\n

Tool Windows and Dialogs

Project	CMD + 1
Version Control	CMD + 9
Preferences	CMD + ,
Breakpoints	SHIFT + COMMAND + F8
Recent Files	CMD + E
Search Everywhere	SHIFT + SHIFT
Search Classes	CMD + O
Search Symbols	OPTION + CMD + O
Navigate back and forth through recent files	CMD + [ and CMD + ]
New file (where selection is in Project window)	CMD + N Note: you can use slashes to create entire trees abc/def/ghi/jkl…
Hide all other windows	SHIFT + CMD + F12
Stretch pane right or left	SHIFT + CMD + left or right arrow
Clipboard History	SHIFT + CMD + V
Method List (of the active editor file)	CMD + F12
Navigation Bar	CMD + up arrow Note: This is particularly useful if you turn off the normal navigation bar in preferences to save UI space.
Action Search	SHIFT + CMD + A (try, for example, “RESTful Web Service”)
Version Control Quick List	CTRL + V
Quick Switch Settings	CTRL + ~
Quick Documentation	CTRL + J (and then again to pin it open at larger size).

\n\n

TO DO items

\n\n

Create a TO DO item

\n\n

CMD + / to create a new comment line
Type TODO then whatever comment you want

\n\n

View all TO DO items

\n\n

View > Tool Windows > TODO or
CMD + 6

\n\n

Increase IntelliJ IDE memory on a Mac

\n\n

Help > Edit Custom VM Options…
Answer Yes to create the idea.vmoptions file. This will automatically create a copy of the .vmoptions file in the config folder and open a dialog to edit it.
I change -Xmx750m to -Xmx2048m

\n\n

Tips

\n\n

Following are some of the Tip of the Day items that appear when you first open IntelliJ.

\n\n

Highlight usages of some variable

\n\n

Use ⇧⌘F7 (Edit | Find | Highlight Usages in File) to quickly highlight usages of some variable in the current file.
Use ⌘G and ⇧⌘G keys to navigate through highlighted usages.
Press ⎋ to remove highlighting.

\n\n

Optimize imports

\n\n

Use Code | Optimize Imports to automatically optimize imports (remove unused imports, etc.). To access the corresponding settings, use File | Settings | Code Style | Imports.

\n\n

Reformat code

\n\n

Use Code | Reformat Code to reformat code according to your code style preferences (File | Settings | Code Style).

\n\n

References

\n\n

\n 42 IntelliJ IDEA Tips and Tricks, YouTube\n
\n How to increase IDE memory limit in IntelliJ IDEA on Mac?\n

","modified":"2021-05-08T00:50:50.252Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"use-spring-for-stardog-in-a-spring-boot-application","title":"Use Spring for Stardog in a Spring Boot Application","description":"How to incorporate Spring for Stardog into a Spring Boot web app.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-stardog.svg","created":"2017-05-11T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Recently I completed a little study incorporating Spring for Stardog into a Spring Boot web app, with successful results. Here’s how.

\n\n

Introduction

\n\n

Stardog is a Java based RDF repository server (a.k.a. triple-store and more), which supports the RDF graph data model; SPARQL query language; property graph model and Gremlin graph traversal language; HTTP and SNARL protocols for remote access and control; OWL 2 and user-defined rules for inference and data analytics; virtual graphs; geospatial query answering; and programmatic interaction via several languages and network interfaces. At this point, I don’t have a lot of experience with Stardog, but I’ve been experimenting with it to see what I can learn. As part of my study, I recently incorporated Stardog Spring into a Spring Boot web app – taking notes along the way. Here’s my notes on how I got it setup and working successfully.

\n\n

Download and install Stardog

\n\n

For my local development environment on Mac OS, I installed Stardog 5 BETA (Community Edition).

\n\n

You can download Stardog at www.stardog.com. Once you’ve downloaded it, unzip the archive to a destination directory. I’m put mine in /Users/cburleson/stardog

\n\n

Next you need to set the STARDOG_HOME environment variable. You can do this by adding an export line to your .bash_profile.

\n\ncd ~\nsudo nano .bash_profile\n\n

Add the following line to .bash_profile:

\n\n

export STARDOG_HOME=/Users/cburleson/stardog

\n\n

Save changes made to .bash_profile by hitting Control+o (that’s an o as in otter), ENTER, then exit out of nano by hitting Control+X.

\n\n

Note that changes made .bash_profile will require the shell to be restarted or a new shell to spawn.

\n\n

Copy stardog-license-key.bin into the STARDOG_HOME location. Then you can start the Stardog server to test your installation.

\n\n

Start the Stardog server

\n\n

/Users/cburleson/stardog/bin/stardog-admin server start

\n\n

If everything is working properly, you should get the following response.

\n\n

Stardog server is listening on all network interfaces.\nHTTP server available at http://localhost:5820.\n \nSTARDOG_HOME=/Users/cburleson/stardog

\n\n

the server is running and can be accessed in a web browser at http://localhost:5820/

\n\n

\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Username	admin
Password	admin

\n\n

You can also check the server status with the following command:

\n\n

/Users/cburleson/stardog/bin/stardog-admin server status

\n\n

Now, that you’ve tested the installation, you can stop the server with the following command.

\n\n

/Users/cburleson/stardog/bin/stardog-admin server stop

\n\n

Add the Stardog Maven Repo to pom.xml

\n\n

In order to get the required dependencies, you need to add the Stardog public maven repository to your repositories defined in the Maven POM (pom.xml). Here’s how that section looks in my file:

\n\n

<repositories>\n \n <repository>\n     <id>spring-releases</id>\n     <url>https://repo.spring.io/libs-release</url>\n </repository>\n\n <repository>\n     <id>stardog-public</id>\n     <url>http://maven.stardog.com</url>\n </repository>\n\n</repositories>

\n\n\n

Add Stardog dependencies to pom.xml

\n\n

Now, we can add the required dependencies. Notice that even though I installed Stardog 5 BETA, I’m using a different version number for various dependencies (still, it works).

\n\n

<dependency>\n    <groupId>com.complexible.stardog</groupId>\n    <artifactId>client-snarl</artifactId>\n    <version>4.2.4</version>\n    <type>pom</type>\n</dependency>\n \n \n<dependency>\n    <groupId>com.complexible.stardog</groupId>\n    <artifactId>client-http</artifactId>\n    <version>4.2.4</version>\n    <type>pom</type>\n</dependency>\n \n \n<dependency>\n    <groupId>com.complexible.stardog</groupId>\n    <artifactId>server</artifactId>\n    <version>4.2.4</version>\n    <type>pom</type>\n</dependency>\n \n<!--\n<dependency>\n    <groupId>com.complexible.stardog.sesame</groupId>\n    <artifactId>stardog-sesame-core</artifactId>\n    <version>4.2.4</version>\n    <type>jar</type>\n</dependency>\n-->\n<!--\n<dependency>\n  <groupId>com.complexible.stardog.jena</groupId>\n  <artifactId>stardog-jena</artifactId>\n  <version>4.2.4</version>\n  <type>jar</type>\n</dependency>\n-->\n \n<!--\n<dependency>\n    <groupId>com.complexible.stardog.gremlin</groupId>\n    <artifactId>stardog-gremlin</artifactId>\n    <version>4.2.4</version>\n    <type>jar</type>\n</dependency>\n-->\n \n \n<dependency>\n    <groupId>com.complexible.stardog</groupId>\n    <artifactId>stardog-spring</artifactId>\n    <version>2.1.3</version>\n    <type>jar</type>\n</dependency>\n \n \n<!--\n<dependency>\n    <groupId>com.complexible.stardog</groupId>\n    <artifactId>stardog-spring-batch</artifactId>\n    <version>2.1.3</version>\n    <type>jar</type>\n</dependency>\n-->\n \n<!-- https://mvnrepository.com/artifact/org.apache.lucene/lucene-core -->\n<dependency>\n    <groupId>org.apache.lucene</groupId>\n    <artifactId>lucene-core</artifactId>\n    <version>6.5.1</version>\n</dependency>

\n\n

Notice that I’ve got stardog-spring-batch commented in the file, but commented out. I put it in the file incase I decide to use it in the future, but for now, I don’t need it.

\n\n

Create or edit Spring application context file

\n\n

I prefer using pure Java only configuration for Spring, but I had trouble with this one, so opted to use the XML configuration. I created the following file inside of src/main/resources...

\n\n

applicationContext.xml

\n\n

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>\n<beans xmlns="http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans"\n       xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"\n       xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans/spring-beans.xsd">\n \n    <bean name="embeddedProvider" class="com.base22.rdfx.config.EmbeddedProvider"></bean>\n \n    <bean name="dataSource" class="com.complexible.stardog.ext.spring.DataSourceFactoryBean">\n        <property name="to" value="testdb"/>\n        <property name="provider" ref="embeddedProvider"/>\n        <property name="username" value="admin"/>\n        <property name="password" value="admin"/>\n    </bean>\n \n    <bean name="template" class="com.complexible.stardog.ext.spring.SnarlTemplate">\n        <property name="dataSource" ref="dataSource"/>\n    </bean>\n \n    <bean name="importer" class="com.complexible.stardog.ext.spring.DataImporter">\n        <property name="snarlTemplate" ref="template"/>\n        <property name="format" value="N3"/>\n        <property name="inputFiles">\n            <list>\n                <value>classpath:data/sp2b_10k.n3</value>\n            </list>\n        </property>\n    </bean>\n \n</beans>

\n\n

Notice that the data importer bean is going to look for an RDF file in the classpath, which should exist in src/main/resources/data.

\n\n

I got that file from the source project for stardog-spring, which you can find on GitHub at: https://github.com/stardog-union/stardog-spring

\n\n

You could use any RDF file that you want to have auto-loaded into the Stardog repository.

\n\n

Make the applicationContext.xml available to your Spring Boot app

\n\n

In order for your Spring Boot app to recognize and load the applicationContext.xml, you’ll need to add an annotation to the main application class (the one with a Java main() method)…

\n\n

The annotation you’ll need to add is:

\n\n

@ImportResource(\"classpath:applicationContext.xml\")

\n\n

My main application class looks like this:

\n\n

package com.base22.rdfx;\n  \n  import org.springframework.boot.SpringApplication;\n  import org.springframework.boot.autoconfigure.SpringBootApplication;\n  import org.springframework.context.annotation.ImportResource;\n    \n  @SpringBootApplication\n  @ImportResource("classpath:applicationContext.xml")\n  public class Platform {\n    \n      public static void main(String[] args) throws Exception {\n          SpringApplication.run(Platform.class, args);\n      }\n    \n  }

\n\n

Create an EmbeddedProvider Java class

\n\n

The applicationContext.xml file references an EmbeddedProvider class. There is no EmbeddedProvider exposed by the stardog-spring library, but I found one in the stardog-spring source code at src/main/test/java/com/complexible/stardog/ext/spring.

\n\n

You’ll need to create this class in your project and make sure that you reference the package and class properly for the embeddedProvider bean in your applicationContext.xml file.

\n\n

EmbeddedProvider.java

\n\n

package com.base22.rdfx.config;\n \n import com.complexible.common.protocols.server.ServerException;\n import com.complexible.stardog.Stardog;\n import com.complexible.stardog.StardogException;\n import com.complexible.stardog.api.admin.AdminConnection;\n import com.complexible.stardog.api.admin.AdminConnectionConfiguration;\n import com.complexible.stardog.ext.spring.Provider;\n import com.complexible.stardog.protocols.snarl.SNARLProtocolConstants;\n  \n public class EmbeddedProvider implements Provider {\n  \n    @Override\n    public void execute(String to, String url, String user, String pass) {\n  \n       try {\n          Stardog.builder()\n                .create()\n                .newServer()\n                .bind(SNARLProtocolConstants.EMBEDDED_ADDRESS)\n                .start();\n          AdminConnection dbms = AdminConnectionConfiguration.toEmbeddedServer().credentials(user, pass).connect();\n          if (dbms.list().contains(to)) {\n             dbms.drop(to);\n             dbms.createMemory(to);\n          } else {\n             dbms.createMemory(to);\n          }\n          dbms.close();\n       } catch (StardogException e) {\n  \n       } catch (ServerException e) {\n  \n       } finally {\n  \n       }\n  \n    }\n }

\n\n

Use the Spring for Stardog SnarlTemplate in a controller

\n\n

For a quick acid test, I created a simple Spring Controller that gets executed when you hit the path /test in a web browser.

\n\n

Here’s the simple test controller I created, which logs output from a SPARQL query to the console.

\n\n

TestController.java

\n\n

package com.base22.rdfx.controllers;\n \n import com.complexible.stardog.ext.spring.SnarlTemplate;\n import com.complexible.stardog.ext.spring.mapper.SimpleRowMapper;\n import org.slf4j.Logger;\n import org.slf4j.LoggerFactory;\n import org.springframework.beans.factory.annotation.Autowired;\n import org.springframework.web.bind.annotation.RequestMapping;\n import org.springframework.web.bind.annotation.RequestParam;\n import org.springframework.web.bind.annotation.RestController;\n  \n import java.util.Iterator;\n import java.util.List;\n import java.util.Map;\n import java.util.Set;\n  \n @RestController\n public class TestController {\n  \n    private static final Logger log = LoggerFactory.getLogger( TestController.class);\n  \n    @Autowired\n    private SnarlTemplate template;\n  \n    //private static final String template = "Hello, %s!";\n    //private final AtomicLong counter = new AtomicLong();\n  \n    @RequestMapping("/test")\n    public void test(@RequestParam(value="name", defaultValue="World") String name) {\n  \n       log.trace(">> test()");\n  \n       String sparql = "SELECT ?s ?p ?o WHERE { ?s ?p ?o } LIMIT 5";\n  \n       List<Map<String,String>> results = template.query(sparql, new SimpleRowMapper());\n  \n       for ( Map<String, String> result : results ) {\n  \n          log.trace( "-- test() > --------------------------");\n  \n          Set keys = result.keySet();\n  \n          for ( Iterator i = keys.iterator(); i.hasNext(); ) {\n             String key = (String) i.next();\n             String value = result.get(key);\n             log.trace("-- test() > " + key + " | " + value);\n          }\n  \n       }\n  \n    }\n  \n }

\n\n

How to use the SnarlTemplate

\n\n

The Spring Programming section of the documentation on the Stardog website provides some good information. However, if you want to see some actual code examples, you might want to refer to the TestDataSourceFactory.java class on GitHub. That’s where I learned how to execute the query shown in my TestController using a SimpleRowMapper.

\n\n

Test the app

\n\n

Now you should be able to run your Spring Boot application and hit the TestController (/test in your browser). When you hit the URL, you should see the following output logged to the console, which shows that you’ve successfully configured and used Spring for Stardog. As you can see, five triples were returned from the given LIMIT 5 SPARQL query…

\n\n

14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > --------------------------\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > p | http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#subClassOf\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > s | http://localhost/vocabulary/bench/Journal\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > o | http://xmlns.com/foaf/0.1/Document\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > --------------------------\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > p | http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#subClassOf\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > s | http://localhost/vocabulary/bench/Proceedings\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > o | http://xmlns.com/foaf/0.1/Document\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > --------------------------\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > p | http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#subClassOf\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > s | http://localhost/vocabulary/bench/Inproceedings\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > o | http://xmlns.com/foaf/0.1/Document\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > --------------------------\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > p | http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#subClassOf\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > s | http://localhost/vocabulary/bench/Article\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > o | http://xmlns.com/foaf/0.1/Document\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > --------------------------\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > p | http://www.w3.org/2000/01/rdf-schema#subClassOf\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > s | http://localhost/vocabulary/bench/Www\n14:40:36.903 [http-nio-8080-exec-1] TRACE com.base22.rdfx.controllers.TestController - -- test() > o | http://xmlns.com/foaf/0.1/Document

\n\n

Conclusion

\n\n

In this post, I showed how I used Spring for Stardog in a Spring Boot web app. With some minor variation, these instructions could probably be useful for any Spring app and not just a Spring Boot web app.

\n\n

There is also some useful information in the QUICKSTART.txt file on GitHub that you might find useful, so be sure to check it out.

","modified":"2021-05-07T18:22:47.814Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"linux-and-unix-commands","title":"Linux and Unix Commands","description":"My collection of handy Linux, Unix, and Mac OS terminal commands.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-linux.svg","created":"2017-04-22T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2023-02-14T22:48:59.005Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

My collection of handy Linux, Unix, and Mac OS terminal commands.

\n\n

Change file permissions

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Command	Usage
`chmod +x filename.ext`	Give execute access to a file.
`sudo chmod -R 777 workspace`	`-R` means RECURSIVE
`sudo chown -R basejump workspace`	Take ownership of a file. basejump (the user) and workspace (the directory)

\n\n

Compress or extract files

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Command Usage

tar -zxvf file.tar.gz To extract one or more members from an archive:

Command	Usage
`tar -zxvf file.tar.gz`	To extract one or more members from an archive:
\n `tar -czvf name-of-archive.tar.gz /path/to/directory-or-file`\n	Compress an entire directory or single file. \n Note: Be sure to add the `.tar.gz` in the archive file name yourself; the command doesn't do it for you. \n \n Here's what the switches mean: `-c`: Create an archive. `-z`: Compress the archive with gzip. `-v`: Display progress in the terminal \n while creating the archive, also known as "verbose" mode. The `v` is always optional in these commands, but \n it's helpful. `-f`: Allows you to specify the filename of the archive.
\n `gzip -9 /path/to/file` \n Example: `gzip -9 ./data/*.ldif`\n	Compress files with -9 signifying highest level of compression. \n The original files will be removed, leaving only the archives (.gz) that replace them.

\n tar -czvf name-of-archive.tar.gz /path/to/directory-or-file\n

Compress an entire directory or single file.

Note: Be sure to add the .tar.gz in the archive file name yourself; the command doesn't do it for you.
\n

Here's what the switches mean: -c: Create an archive. -z: Compress the archive with gzip. -v: Display progress in the terminal
\n while creating the archive, also known as "verbose" mode. The v is always optional in these commands, but
\n it's helpful. -f: Allows you to specify the filename of the archive.

\n gzip -9 /path/to/file
\n Example: gzip -9 ./data/*.ldif\n

Compress files with -9 signifying highest level of compression.

The original files will be removed, leaving only the archives (.gz) that replace them.

\n\n

Copy File Between Local Machine and Remote Server

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Command	Usage
`scp /local/path/to/file user@server:/path/to/destination`	scp stands for 'secure copy.' It copies files over a secure, encrypted network connection. This command copies a file from your local machine to the given server.
`scp user@remote_host:/path/to/remote/file /path/to/local_file`	This command downloads the specified file from the specified remote server to your local machine.

\n\n

Create an alias for a common command

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Command Usage

Command	Usage
`alias p="<command>"`	Create shortcut aliases to common commands. \n For example: \n `alias p="open /x/yx/z"` to open a particular directory in Finder \n

alias p="<command>"

Create shortcut aliases to common commands.

For example:

alias p="open /x/yx/z" to open a particular directory in Finder

\n\n

Directory commands

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Command	Usage
`pwd`	Print working directory (the directory you're currently in).
`mv <oldDirName> <newDirName>`	Rename a directory. Be aware: this is actually a move command. So, you’re just moving \n the directory from one name to another in the same path.
`rmdir`	Remove an empty directory
`rm -rf <dirName>`	Forcefully remove a directory recursively.\n Remove the f switch to be prompted for each sub-directory and file inside.
`cp -rf present/directory /desire/directory`	Copy an entire directory, its subdirectories, and files.\n Remove the f switch to be prompted for each sub-directory and file inside.

\n\n

Execute command as root user

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Command	Usage
`sudo <command>`	Execute command as the root user.
`sudo !!`	Execute the last command as root user. (`!!`) represents the last command \n you just tried to run, but couldn't because of permission issues.

\n\n

Execute task in background

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Command	Usage
`./startTest.sh &`	Start the execution in the background, which will allow you to kill your SSH terminal \n without killing the process itself.

\n\n

Find large files

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Command	Usage
`cd / find . -size +10000000c -print`	Prints out the names of all files with size > 10mb.
`cd / sudo du -sm *`	Examine the size of the directories under /. You can then navigate into \n any given subdirectory and execute `du -sm *` again to see which subdirectories are the largest.

\n\n

Inspect disk space and usage

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Command	Usage
`df -h`	Inspect disk space and usage (in MB or GB)

\n\n

Work with environment variables

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Command	Usage
`printenv`	Prints all currently set environment variables and values.

\n\n

Remove a file

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Command	Usage
`mv`	Rename a file
`rm`	Remove a file
`rm -f`	Forcefully remove a file
`rm -i`	Interactively remove a file

\n\n

If you are not certain about removing files that match a pattern you supply, it is always good to run rm interactively (rm –i) to prompt before every removal.

\n\n

Switch user

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Command	Usage
`su – <username>`	Switch to the given user, loading their profile. You may have to use sudo su – <username>.
`su`	Without a username means to just switch to root user.
`whoami`	"Who Am I?" Prints the current user.

\n\n

View a file

\n\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Command	Usage
`cat`	Used for viewing files that are not very long; it does not provide any scroll-back.
`tac`	Used to look at a file backwards, starting with the last line.
`less`	Used to view larger files because it is a paging program; it pauses at each \n screenful of text, provides scroll-back capabilities, and lets you search and navigate within the file. Note:\n Use / to search for a pattern in the forward direction and ? for a pattern in the backward direction. Press `Q` to quit.
`tail`	Used to print the last 10 lines of a file by default. You can change the \n number of lines by doing -n 15 or just -15 if you wanted to look at the last 15 lines instead of the default.
`head`	The opposite of tail; by default it prints the first 10 lines of a file.

\n\n

Update the OS packages

\n\nsudo apt-get update\nsudo apt-get upgrade\nsudo apt-get dist-upgrade\nsudo reboot\n\n

Use pipes

\n\n

The UNIX/Linux philosophy is to have many simple and short programs (or commands) cooperate together to produce quite complex results, rather than have one complex program with many possible options and modes of operation. In order to accomplish this, extensive use of pipes is made; you can pipe the output of one command or program into another as its input. In order to do this we use the vertical-bar, |, (pipe symbol) between commands as in: $ command1 | command2 | command3 This represents what we often call a pipeline and allows Linux to combine the actions of several commands into one. This is extraordinarily efficient because command2 and command3 do not have to wait for the previous pipeline commands to complete before they can begin hacking at the data in their input streams; on multiple CPU or core systems the available computing power is much better utilized and things get done quicker. In addition there is no need to save output in (temporary) files between the stages in the pipeline, which saves disk space and reduces reading and writing from disk, which is often the slowest bottleneck in getting something done.

\n\n

Split a large text file into smaller parts

\n\n

The Linux split command can help you break up really large text files into smaller, more manageable parts.

\n\n

split -l <line-numbers> <source-file> <destination-file-prefix>

\n\n

For example:

\n\n

split -l 5000000 data3.trig segment

\n\n

Fast string replace using stream editor (sed)

\n\n

If you need to replace strings in a very large file or many files, you can use sed, the streaming editor. It's very fast because it uses streaming. This sure beats opening individual files in some editor and then using a find and replace function. The string positions expect regex, so be careful for special characters.

\n\n

sed 's/<original-string>/<revised-string>/' <source-file> > <new-file>

\n\n

For example:

\n\n

sed 's/dev.acme.com:48083/ldp.demo:8083/' segment-aa > segmentaa

\n\n

Change default shell (on Mac OS X)

\n\n

You can change the default shell through the command line chsh command, which is shorthand for ‘change shell’. You’ll need to authenticate each change as well, the command will ask directly or you can prefix it with sudo. Here’s how to set the default user shell to zsh, bash, tcsh, ksh, sh, or any other shell for that matter.

\n\n

zsh: chsh -s /bin/zsh
ksh: chsh -s /bin/ksh
tcsh: chsh -s /bin/tcsh
bash (default): chsh -s /bin/bash
sh: chsh -s /bin/sh
other shells: chsh -s /path/to/alternate/shell

\n\n

Related Web Resources

\n","features":["syntax highlighter"],"path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":"","ogImage":""},{"_id":"serve-static-resources-with-spring-boot","title":"Serve Static Resources With Spring Boot","description":"Learn how to serve static resources with Spring Boot.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-spring-framework.svg","created":"2017-04-05T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-07T18:25:28.280Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

To automatically serve static resources with Spring Boot (e.g. when using spring-boot-starter-web), you can\n simply place the static resources in one of several paths that Spring Boot automatically recognizes as a\n static file paths.

Following are paths that will are recognized as static file paths:

src/main/resources/META-INF/resources/index.html
src/main/resources/resources/index.html
src/main/resources/static/index.html
src/main/resources/public/index.html

You can then access the resources at:

http://host/index.html

So, for example, given the following resource at the following location…

src/main/resources/static/css/bootstrap.min.css

You could fetch the file with the following URL:

http://host/css/bootstrap.min.css

\n\n","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"confluence-panel-macro","title":"Confluence Panel Macro","description":"A macro plugin I made for Atlassian Confluence that mimics a Bootstrap 3 Panel.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-confluence.svg","created":"2017-04-04T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

A macro plugin I made for Atlassian Confluence that mimics a Bootstrap 3 Panel.

\n\n

Overview

\n\n

This is a simple macro I developed that mimics the Bootstrap 3 Panel. The macro takes an optional Title, an optional Style, and a rich text macro body. It renders results as shown in the examples section below.

\n \n

I did this as a learning exercise in preparation to do a more sophisticated plugin for Confluence. You might find the code useful if your doing something similar. You can find the source code in the following public repository on GitHub:

\n \n

https://github.com/codyburleson/confluence-panel-macro

\n \n

Tested on:

\n \n

Atlassian Confluence 6.0.5
Google Chrome Version 57.0.2987.98 (64-bit) on Mac OS

\n \n

If you find any issues, please open an issue on GitHub.

\n \n

Examples

\n \n

$\"Confluence$

\n \n

Download

\n \n

The current version of the macro can be downloaded from the link below. If you want to try it out, you can upload the jar through Manage add-ons in the Confluence admin area.

\n \n

panelMacro-1.0.0-SNAPSHOT.jar

\n\n","modified":"2021-05-07T18:26:24.512Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"logging-with-spring-boot","title":"Logging With Spring Boot","description":"Quick and simple tips to get your Spring Boot logs rolling.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-spring-framework.svg","created":"2017-04-04T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Logging with Spring Boot is dead simple. Everything’s pretty much setup and ready to go. In this post, I provide some quick and simple tips to get your Spring Boot logs rolling.

\n\n

About Logging Dependencies

\n\n

If you use the ‘Starters’, Logback will be used with appropriate routing included to ensure that dependent libraries that use Java Util Logging, Commons Logging, Log4J or SLF4J will all work correctly. Let’s suppose, for example, that you’re using the web starter in your Maven pom.xml file, as shown below.

\n\n

<dependency>\n    <groupId>org.springframework.boot</groupId>\n    <artifactId>spring-boot-starter-web</artifactId>\n</dependency>

\n\n\n

Generally you won’t need to change any logging dependencies and the Spring Boot defaults will work just fine. That is to say, you don’t need to add any additional dependencies to the POM for logging. You can verify this by printing a tree representation of your project dependencies. On the command line, change to your project directory and executing the following command.

\n\n

Print Maven Dependency Tree with the command: mvn dependency:tree

\n\n

Notice that the Spring Boot starter already includes dependencies for logging…

\n\n

[INFO] +- org.springframework.boot:spring-boot-starter-web:jar:1.5.2.RELEASE:compile\n[INFO] |  +- org.springframework.boot:spring-boot-starter:jar:1.5.2.RELEASE:compile\n[INFO] |  |  +- org.springframework.boot:spring-boot-starter-logging:jar:1.5.2.RELEASE:compile\n[INFO] |  |  |  +- ch.qos.logback:logback-classic:jar:1.1.11:compile\n[INFO] |  |  |  |  \\- ch.qos.logback:logback-core:jar:1.1.11:compile\n[INFO] |  |  |  +- org.slf4j:jcl-over-slf4j:jar:1.7.24:compile\n[INFO] |  |  |  +- org.slf4j:jul-to-slf4j:jar:1.7.24:compile\n[INFO] |  |  |  \\- org.slf4j:log4j-over-slf4j:jar:1.7.24:compile

\n\n

Configure Log Levels

\n\n

The easiest way to configure logging levels is in the application.properties file. If you don’t already have one, create the file in the root of the resources folder. Then, simply prefix Java packages and classes with logging.level as shown below. Notice that you can configure the root logger at a specific level first, then get more specific with other loggers.

\n\n

application.properties

\n\nlogging.level.root=INFO\nlogging.level.com.cburleson.rdfx=TRACE\n\n

Put Logging Code in Your Classes

\n\n

Now, we can use SLF4J for logging. Here’s how.

\n\n

Add the following to the imports section of your java code:

\n\nimport org.slf4j.Logger;\nimport org.slf4j.LoggerFactory;\n\n

Add the following at the top of your class in the global section (just under the line that declares your class public class Whatever extends Whatever). Change the name of the class (MyClassName) in the getLogger method call, of course. Name it the same as the class you’re dropping this code into.

\n\nstatic final Logger LOG = LoggerFactory.getLogger(MyClassName.class);\n\n

To test quickly, you can throw some logging statements in your code somewhere where you know they’ll be fired right away when you run your app. For example:

\n\n

LOG.trace(\"Hello World!\");\nLOG.debug(\"How are you today?\");\nLOG.info(\"I am fine.\");\nLOG.warn(\"I love programming.\");\nLOG.error(\"I am programming.\");

\n\n

The default log configuration will echo messages to the console as they are written. If your terminal supports ANSI, color output will be used to aid readability.

\n\n

Log to a File

\n\n

If you want to write log files in addition to the console, you can set a logging.file or logging.path property in your application.properties file. For example…

\n\n

logging.level.root=INFO\nlogging.level.com.cburleson.rdfx=TRACE\n#output to a temp_folder/file\nlogging.file=${java.io.tmpdir}/myapp.log\n#output to a file\n#logging.file=/Users/cburleson/myapp.log\n#output to a file called spring.log in the specified path\n#logging.path=/var/log

\n\n

Using SLF4J over Log4j

\n\n

Now, if you want to use SLF4 over Log4j 2, and a log4j configuration file, the setup is a little different. In your Maven, POM, you must exclude spring-boot-starter-logging and then add a dependency for spring-boot-starter-log4j2 as shown below.

\n\n

<dependency>\n    <groupId>org.springframework.boot</groupId>\n    <artifactId>spring-boot-starter-web</artifactId>\n    <exclusions>\n        <exclusion>\n            <groupId>org.springframework.boot</groupId>\n            <artifactId>spring-boot-starter-logging</artifactId>\n        </exclusion>\n    </exclusions>\n</dependency>\n \n<dependency>\n    <groupId>org.springframework.boot</groupId>\n    <artifactId>spring-boot-starter-log4j2</artifactId>\n</dependency>

\n\n

Then you need to have a log4j2.xml file on the classpath; for example – in src/main/resources. Here’s a simple log4j2.xml file example.

\n\n

log4j2.xml

\n\n

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>\n<Configuration status="INFO">\n    <Appenders>\n        <Console name="Console" target="SYSTEM_OUT">\n            <PatternLayout pattern="%d{HH:mm:ss.SSS} [%t] %-5level %logger{36} - %msg%n" />\n        </Console>\n        <File name="MyFile" fileName="all.log" immediateFlush="false" append="false">\n            <PatternLayout pattern="%d{yyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ss.SSS} [%t] %-5level %logger{36} - %msg%n"/>\n        </File>\n    </Appenders>\n    <Loggers>\n        <Root level="debug">\n            <AppenderRef ref="Console" />\n            <!-- AppenderRef ref="MyFile"/ -->\n        </Root>\n \n        <Logger name="com.base22" level="trace" additivity="false">\n            <AppenderRef ref="Console"/>\n        </Logger>\n \n    </Loggers>\n</Configuration>

\n\n

Conclusion

\n\n

As you can see, logging from your Spring Boot application is piece of cake. Of course, there’s a lot more that you can do as your requirements dictate. For more information, take a look at Logging, in the Spring Boot Reference Guide.

\n\n

References

\n\n

Logging, in the Spring Boot Reference Guide
Logging in Spring Boot, by Andrea Ligios, Baeldung

","modified":"2021-06-01T04:45:54.045Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"enhance-your-front-end-web-dev-workflow-with-emmet","title":"Enhance Your Front-End Web Dev Workflow With Emmet, which is built in to WebStorm, IDEA, and Microsoft VS Code.","description":"Learn how to write HTML faster with Emmet.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-emmet.svg","created":"2017-03-10T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Did you know that Emmet’s built-in to WebStorm, IDEA, and Microsoft VS Code? Emmet takes the snippets idea to a whole new level: you can type CSS-like expressions that imply the HTML structure you want and have the IDE spit out the desired HTML.

\n\n

Try It!

\n\n

Here’s a simple example of a basic expression in the Emmet syntax. Try typing the following in an HTML page in your IDE. If your using VS Code, you simply hit ENTER or RETURN after the expression. If you’re using an IntelliJ product like WebStorm or IDEA, you have to press TAB after the expression.

\n\n ul>li*10\n\n

At the end of the expression, just hit the Tab key. WebStorm will use Emmet to parse the text and spit out the intended HTML which, in this case, will be an unordered list with 5 list items (shown below):

\n\n<ul>\n <li></li>\n <li></li>\n <li></li>\n <li></li>\n <li></li>\n</ul>\n\n

For details, you can refer to the Emmet Documentation, but for convenience, I’m including the most common stuff below. There’s a lot more to it though, so if you like what you see here, be sure to RTFM.

\n\n

Emmet Syntax

\n\n

Nesting

\n\n

You can use > operator to nest elements inside each other:

\n\ndiv>ul>li\n\n

Result:

\n\n<div>\n <ul>\n <li></li>\n </ul>\n</div>\n\n

Sibling

\n\n

Use + operator to place elements near each other, on the same level:

\n\ndiv+p+bq\n\n

Result:

\n\n<div></div>\n<p></p>\n<blockquote></blockquote>\n\n

Multiplication

\n\n

With * operator you can define how many times element should be outputted:

\n\nul>li*5\n\n

Result:

\n\n<ul>\n <li></li>\n <li></li>\n <li></li>\n <li></li>\n <li></li>\n</ul>\n\n

Grouping

\n\n

Parenthesises are used by Emmets’ power users for grouping subtrees in complex abbreviations:

\n\ndiv>(header>ul>li*2>a)+footer>p\n\n

Result:

\n\n

<div>\n    <header>\n        <ul>\n            <li><a href=""></a></li>\n            <li><a href=""></a></li>\n        </ul>\n    </header>\n    <footer>\n        <p></p>\n    </footer>\n</div>

\n\n

If you’re working with browser’s DOM, you may think of groups as Document Fragments: each group contains abbreviation subtree and all the following elements are inserted at the same level as the first element of group.

\n\n

You can nest groups inside each other and combine them with multiplication * operator.

\n\n

ID and CLASS

\n\n

In CSS, you use elem#id and elem.class notation to reach the elements with specified id or class attributes. In Emmet, you can use the very same syntax to add these attributes to specified element:

\n\ndiv#header+div.page+div#footer.class1.class2.class3\n\n

Result:

\n\n<div id="header"></div>\n<div class="page"></div>\n<div id="footer" class="class1 class2 class3"></div>\n\n

Custom attributes

\n\n

You can use [attr] notation (as in CSS) to add custom attributes to your element:

\n\n td[title=\"Hello world!\" colspan=3]\n\n

Result:

\n\n<td title="Hello world!" colspan="3"></td>\n\n

Item numbering

\n\n

With multiplication * operator you can repeat elements, but with $ you can number them. Place $ operator inside element’s name, attribute’s name or attribute’s value to output current number of repeated element:

\n\nul>li.item$*5\n\n

Result:

\n\n

<ul>\n    <li class="item1"></li>\n    <li class="item2"></li>\n    <li class="item3"></li>\n    <li class="item4"></li>\n    <li class="item5"></li>\n</ul>

\n\n

You can use multiple $ in a row to pad number with zeroes:

\n\nul>li.item$$*5\n\n

Result:

\n\n

<ul>\n    <li class="item001"></li>\n    <li class="item002"></li>\n    <li class="item003"></li>\n    <li class="item004"></li>\n    <li class="item005"></li>\n</ul>

\n\n

Text

\n\n

You can use curly braces to add text to element:

\n\na{Click me}\n\n

Result:

\n\n<a href="">Click me</a>\n\n

Greek Text

\n\n

You know – that filler text that designers use when they can’t think of real words that are relevant to a design…

\n\nlorem5\n\n

Result:

\n\nLorem ipsum dolor sit amet.\n\n

Holy shit example

\n\n

Here’s a crazy example to give you an idea of what you can accomplish if you get bad ass with Emmet.

\n\n

nav#menuSystem.navMenu.isOpen>div#hotelLogo>div.navMenuIcon.logoIcon+div#arrowPointer+ul#navMenuMain>li.navMenuItem.navMenuItem$$*10>div.navMenuIcon{Item $}+a{Item $}

\n\n

Result:

\n\n

<nav id="menuSystem" class="navMenu isOpen">\n   <div id="hotelLogo">\n      <div class="navMenuIcon logoIcon"></div>\n      <div id="arrowPointer"></div>\n      <ul id="navMenuMain">\n         <li class="navMenuItem navMenuItem001">\n            <div class="navMenuIcon">Item 1</div>\n            <a>Item 1</a></li>\n         <li class="navMenuItem navMenuItem002">\n            <div class="navMenuIcon">Item 2</div>\n            <a>Item 2</a></li>\n         <li class="navMenuItem navMenuItem003">\n            <div class="navMenuIcon">Item 3</div>\n            <a>Item 3</a></li>\n         <li class="navMenuItem navMenuItem004">\n            <div class="navMenuIcon">Item 4</div>\n            <a>Item 4</a></li>\n         <li class="navMenuItem navMenuItem005">\n            <div class="navMenuIcon">Item 5</div>\n            <a>Item 5</a></li>\n         <li class="navMenuItem navMenuItem006">\n            <div class="navMenuIcon">Item 6</div>\n            <a>Item 6</a></li>\n         <li class="navMenuItem navMenuItem007">\n            <div class="navMenuIcon">Item 7</div>\n            <a>Item 7</a></li>\n         <li class="navMenuItem navMenuItem008">\n            <div class="navMenuIcon">Item 8</div>\n            <a>Item 8</a></li>\n         <li class="navMenuItem navMenuItem009">\n            <div class="navMenuIcon">Item 9</div>\n            <a>Item 9</a></li>\n         <li class="navMenuItem navMenuItem010">\n            <div class="navMenuIcon">Item 10</div>\n            <a>Item 10</a></li>\n      </ul>\n   </div>\n</nav>

","modified":"2021-05-07T18:26:56.334Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"avoid-tracking-ga-page-views-in-atlassian-confluence","title":"How to Avoid Tracking Google Analytics Page Views for Admin or Specific Users in Atlassian Confluence","description":"Here's how to avoid tracking page views in Google Analytics when you're logged into Confluence as an admin or other specific user.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-google-analytics.svg","created":"2017-02-22T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Here's how to avoid tracking page views in Google Analytics when you're logged in as an administrative or other specific user.

This solution presupposes that your Google Analytics tracking snippet is pasted into the field labelled "At end of the HEAD" in the Custom HTML section in the Confluence Administration Area as shown below…

$\"\"$

Before modification, your Google Analytics tracking code should look something like this.

\n\n

<script>\n(function(i,s,o,g,r,a,m){i['GoogleAnalyticsObject']=r;i[r]=i[r]||function(){\n(i[r].q=i[r].q||[]).push(arguments)},i[r].l=1*new Date();a=s.createElement(o),\nm=s.getElementsByTagName(o)[0];a.async=1;a.src=g;m.parentNode.insertBefore(a,m)\n})(window,document,'script','https://www.google-analytics.com/analytics.js','ga');\n \nga('create', 'UA-XXXXXXXX-X', 'auto');\nga('send', 'pageview');\n \n</script>

\n\n

Now, to avoid tracking pages for an administrative user (or any particular user or set of users, for that matter), you can wrap the ga() function calls in an IF check. In the following code, we use the Confluence AJS object to determine whether or not the authenticated user is an administrative user. If that’s true, we do not reach the ga() functions and thus, the pageview is not tracked. In all other cases, however, the pageview will be tracked.

\n\n

<script>\n(function(i,s,o,g,r,a,m){i['GoogleAnalyticsObject']=r;i[r]=i[r]||function(){\n(i[r].q=i[r].q||[]).push(arguments)},i[r].l=1*new Date();a=s.createElement(o),\nm=s.getElementsByTagName(o)[0];a.async=1;a.src=g;m.parentNode.insertBefore(a,m)\n})(window,document,'script','https://www.google-analytics.com/analytics.js','ga');\n \nif(! AJS.params.isConfluenceAdmin) {\n    ga('create', 'UA-XXXXXXXX-X', 'auto');\n    ga('send', 'pageview');\n}\n</script>

\n\n

You could use console.log statements to test this in your local browser.

If you want to avoid logging page views for specific users, you can check for specific user names with AJS.params.remoteUser.

\n","modified":"2021-07-18T23:11:17.528Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","ogImage":"","subtitle":""},{"_id":"set-the-page-title-in-angular","title":"Set the Page Title in Angular","description":"Angular provides a Title service that you can use to set the title of a page. Here’s how to use it.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-angular.svg","created":"2016-10-31T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-06-03T17:18:32.013Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Angular provides a Title service that you can use to set the title of a page. This is good, of course, for SEO. Here’s how to use it.

\n\n

import { Component } from '@angular/core';\nimport { Title } from '@angular/platform-browser';\n \n@Component({\n    selector: 'my-app', \n    viewProviders: [Title], \n    template: \\`< h1 > MyApp</h1>\\`\n                })\nexport class MyAppComponent {\n    constructor(private titleService: Title) {}\n\n    ngOnInit() {\n        this.setTitle('My Web Page Title');\n    }\n            \n    public setTitle( newTitle: string) {\n        this.titleService.setTitle(newTitle);\n    }\n}

\n\n

The service automatically creates the title element in the head if needed and also sets the value. The service also has a getter method to get the title.

","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"format-currency-in-angular","title":"Format Currency in Angular","description":"How format a number into currency with the Angular currency pipe.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-angular.svg","created":"2016-04-29T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-07T18:29:26.480Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

In Angular, to format a currency, use the currency pipe on a number as shown here.

\n\n\n

\n<tr *ngFor="#item of data">\n     <td><a href="#">{{ item.invoiceNo }}</a></td>\n     <td>{{ item.invoiceDate }}</td>\n     <td>{{ item.invoiceStatus }}</td>\n     <td class="right aligned">{{ item.invoiceTotal | currency:'USD':true:'1.2-2' }}</td>\n</tr>\n

\n\n\n

The first parameter, 'USD', of the pipe is an ISO currency code (e.g. ‘USD’,’EUR’, etc.)
The second parameter, true, is an optional boolean to specify whether or not you want to render the currency symbol (‘$’, ‘€’); default is false
The third parameter,'1.2-2', also optional, specifies how to format the number, using the same formatting rules as apply to the number pipe.

Note, however, that the currency pipe relies on the Internationalization API, which is not available in all browsers. See current browser support for Internationalization API.

Here’s a visual example of what the example shown above renders when used on a decimal number:

$\"\"$

","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"index-of-item-within-angular-ngfor-loop","title":"Index of Item Within Angular NgFor Loop","description":"How to get and print the index (or the iteration number) of the current item in an ngFor loop.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-angular.svg","created":"2016-04-28T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-07T18:29:55.093Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Here's how to get and print the index (or the iteration number) of the current item in an ngFor loop.

\n\n

In Angular, to get the index (or the iteration number) of the current item, add a second part to the ngFor expression (after a semi-colon) as shown here.

\n\n

<tr *ngFor="#item of data; #ndx = index">\n    <td>{{ndx+1}}</td>\n    <td>{{item.po}}</td>\n    <td>{{item.serviceType}}</td>\n    <td>{{item.validStart}}</td>\n    ...\n</tr>

\n\n

Notice that I’m adding 1 to the output expression ( ndx+1 ) because the index is zero-based. The data table row example shown above renders as follows:

\n\n

$\"\"$

","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"quick-and-simple-caching-with-apache-commons-jcs","title":"Quick and Simple Caching With Apache Commons JCS","description":"Need a quick and easy caching system for your web app?","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-apache.svg","created":"2016-02-19T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-06-01T04:47:29.423Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Need a quick and easy caching system for your web app? Don’t you dare roll your own. And don’t even think about doing some kind of quick and dirty HashMap. Setting up a simple cache with Commons JCS™, is easy – you can have a basic LRU Cache up and running in minutes. What’s more, the package is mature and sophisticated, so you can get into more advanced features when the need arises. But let’s take a look at a simple setup.

\n\n

First, the Maven dependency…

\n\n

<dependency>\n     <groupId>org.apache.commons</groupId>\n     <artifactId>commons-jcs-core</artifactId>\n     <version>2.0-beta-1</version>\n</dependency>

\n\n

Next, create the cache config file as follows. Name it cache.ccf and put it in your resources directory on the classpath. The first stanza is the default cache. The second is one I created, for example, to cache a list of people (active users) from an expensive API call into the cloud.

\n\n

# DEFAULT CACHE REGION\njcs.default=DC\njcs.default.cacheattributes=org.apache.commons.jcs.engine.CompositeCacheAttributes\njcs.default.cacheattributes.MaxObjects=1000\njcs.default.cacheattributes.MemoryCacheName=org.apache.commons.jcs.engine.memory.lru.LRUMemoryCache\njcs.default.cacheattributes.UseMemoryShrinker=false\njcs.default.cacheattributes.MaxMemoryIdleTime=3600\njcs.default.cacheattributes.ShrinkerInterval=60\njcs.default.elementattributes=org.apache.commons.jcs.engine.ElementAttributes\njcs.default.elementattributes.IsEternal=false\njcs.default.elementattributes.MaxLife=21600\njcs.default.elementattributes.IdleTime=1800\njcs.default.elementattributes.IsSpool=true\njcs.default.elementattributes.IsRemote=true\njcs.default.elementattributes.IsLateral=true\n \n# PRE-DEFINED CACHE REGIONS\njcs.region.peopleCache=DC\njcs.region.peopleCache.cacheattributes=org.apache.commons.jcs.engine.CompositeCacheAttributes\njcs.region.peopleCache.cacheattributes.MaxObjects=1000\njcs.region.peopleCache.cacheattributes.MemoryCacheName=org.apache.commons.jcs.engine.memory.lru.LRUMemoryCache\njcs.region.peopleCache.cacheattributes.UseMemoryShrinker=false\njcs.region.peopleCache.cacheattributes.MaxMemoryIdleTime=3600\njcs.region.peopleCache.cacheattributes.ShrinkerInterval=60\njcs.region.peopleCache.cacheattributes.MaxSpoolPerRun=500\njcs.region.peopleCache.elementattributes=org.apache.commons.jcs.engine.ElementAttributes\njcs.region.peopleCache.elementattributes.IsEternal=false

\n\n

You’ll need the following imports…

\n\n

import org.apache.commons.jcs.JCS;\nimport org.apache.commons.jcs.access.exception.CacheException;\nimport org.apache.commons.jcs.access.CacheAccess;

\n\n

Get a handle on the cache by name like this…

\n\n

// String is the cache key, the second param is whatever object type you're caching...\nprivate CacheAccess<String, List<User>> cache = null;\n \npublic MyService() {\n \n     try\n     {\n          cache = JCS.getInstance( "peopleCache" );\n     }\n     catch ( CacheException e )\n     {\n            LOG.error( String.format( "Problem initializing cache: %s", e.getMessage() ) );\n     }\n \n}

\n\n

Finally, here’s an example of a fetch method that attempts to get resources from the cache before going back to the expensive API client request.

\n\n

public List getActiveUsers() {\n \n // First, try to get the user list from the cache...\n List userList = cache.get("activeUserList");\n\n // If the userList does not exist in the cache, build it\n // from the repository request and stick it in the cache.\n if(userList == null) {\n\n        UserCollection users = client.getUsers();\n        userList = new ArrayList();\n\n        for (User user : users)\n        {\n            if(user.isActive()) {\n                userList.add(user);\n            }\n        }\n\n        cache.put("activeUserList",userList);\n\n    }\n\n    return userList;\n\n}

\n\n

That’s all you need to do to setup a cache in your web app fast. But if you’re wondering if Commons JCS™ has the chops to handle something more sophisticated, here’s something to ease your concerns. Beyond simply caching objects in memory, it provides numerous additional features:

Memory management
Disk overflow (and defragmentation)
Thread pool controls
Element grouping
Minimal dependencies
Quick nested categorical removal
Data expiration (idle time and max life)
Extensible framework
Fully configurable runtime parameters
Region data separation and configuration
Fine grained element configuration options
Remote synchronization
Remote store recovery
Non-blocking “zombie” (balking facade) pattern
Lateral distribution of elements via HTTP, TCP, or UDP
UDP Discovery of other caches
Element event handling
Remote server chaining (or clustering) and failover
Custom event logging hooks
Custom event queue injection
Custom object serializer injection
Key pattern matching retrieval
Network efficient multi-key retrieval

Before integrating Commons JCS™, be sure to check out possible cache features available on whatever platform you’re building for. For example, you might instead use the built-in DynaCache for IBM WebSphere or the IBM Data Cache for Bluemix. If nothing is already available on your platform, Commons JCS™ can be the way to go.

\n\n","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"7-reasons-why-typescript-helps-you-kick-ass","title":"7 Reasons Why Typescript Helps You Kick Ass","description":"Need a reason to learn Typescript? Here are seven.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-angular.svg","created":"2015-11-16T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2018-07-26T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

$\"\"$

\r\n\r\n

You can now count me as one of the many JavaScript developers who thinks TypeScript is kick-ass. I don’t want to say that I’m old-school, but if you measure by Internet time, I’m pretty old. I grew up shoving JavaScript into onclick attributes years before jQuery was even a thing. It also means that lately, I’ve been feeling a lot like a toddler who just got tossed in the twelve-foot end of a swimming pool and told to swim. I’ve been paddling my ass off to keep up with all the newfangled ways that front-end development is done. Seems like there’s been a whole-scale revolution darn-near overnight – what with all the Node.js, CSS preprocessors, task runners like Gulp and all. But recently, I took a deep dive into TypeScript and I gotta say – it’s a breath of fresh air. I feel like someone just threw me a floaty.

\r\n\r\n

TypeScript adds to everything that JavaScript can already do while giving you a whole new set of features that can really improve the way you work. I’ll explain why in a second, but before you go crying about yet another technology to learn, let me ease your mind. You see, TypeScript is a superset of JavaScript, which means it literally sits right on top JavaScript and, as a result you can take any existing JavaScript code and shove it in a TypeScript file (a file with a .ts extension). Assuming you weren’t drunk when you wrote the code, it’ll work. Once you get the tools in place to compile TypeScript into JavaScript, you can start writing the kind of JavaScript you’re already familiar with in TypeScript files. Then, at your own leisure, you can start learning some of the benefits of TypeScript and start sweetening your code as you go.

\r\n\r\n

I’ll introduce you to seven of the key benefits now so you can know why you might go with TypeScript and where it might lead you.

\r\n\r\n

7 key benefits of TypeScript

\r\n\r\n

Types
Classes
ES6/ECMAScript® 2015 Features
Compile to ES3/ES5/ES6
Generics
Modules
Interfaces

\r\n\r\n

1. Types

\r\n\r\n

One of the most significant value propositions for using TypeScript is that it offers types, which you can associate with function parameters, variables, and other aspects of your code. By this, I mean types like number, boolean, string, and array.

\r\n

As you know, JavaScript is not a strongly typed language, which can be good in some cases, but bad in others. It’s bad for IDE’s for one thing. Without explicit types, developer tools don’t have the semantics they need to help you out. Tools that understand TypeScript can help you find errors in your code at compile time and they can employ techniques like intellisense to give you hints about what you can properly do. A lot of the best and most commonly used tools support TypeScript – Visual Studio, WebStorm, and Sublime Text to name just a few.

\r\n

Your weakly typed code can also be error prone and difficult for other developers to use. Take the following function, which is intended to add two numbers, for example:

\r\n\r\nfunction total(x, y) {\r\n alert( x + y );\r\n}\r\n\r\n

There’s nothing in that code that says that the two parameters given to the function should be numbers and JavaScript won’t enforce it either. If you pass a number and a string, you’d get an unintended result. The result of the following function call would not give you 3, but 12.

\r\n\r\ntotal('1',2);\r\n\r\n

In TypeScript, we can explicitly assign types to the function parameters like this:

\r\n\r\nfunction total(x: number, y: number) {\r\n alert( x + y );\r\n}\r\n\r\n

When we explicitly assign types, developers and IDE’s can better understand the code and that can help us avoid problems before runtime.

\r\n\r\n

2. Classes

\r\n\r\n

JavaScript is a functional language, which has its own benefits, but it can be a hassle when you like to think and organize your code in an object-oriented way. Classes allow that. Just like Java and other object-oriented languages, TypeScript allows you to define classes with fields (variables), a constructor (for seeding the class when creating instances), and functions (methods) among other things.

\r\n\r\n

TypeScript also supports inheritance, so the classes you create can extend other classes and inherit their attributes. So, with TypeScript it’s possible to structure your code in a way that can make a lot more sense than the typical function spaghetti. It’s also makes it easier to to use proven object-oriented patterns.

\r\n\r\n

It’s pretty simple. Here’s a class in TypeScript, for example:

\r\n\r\n

class Greeter {\r\n \r\n    greeting: string;\r\n \r\n    constructor(message: string) {\r\n        this.greeting = message;\r\n    }\r\n \r\n    greet() {\r\n        return \"Hello, \" + this.greeting;\r\n    }\r\n \r\n}

\r\n\r\n

We can instantiate that class using the following code:

\r\n\r\n var greeter = new Greeter(\"world\");\r\n\r\n

Pretty cool, huh? The makers of ES6/ECMAScript® 2015 seem to think so; classes are coming to JavaScript irregardless of TypeScript. Which brings me to the next point.

\r\n\r\n

3. ES6/ECMAScript® 2015

\r\n\r\n

TypeScript allows you to use several features of ES6/ECMAScript® 2015 now without having to worry about how compatible they might be in today’s browsers. With TypeScript, you can start learning and using a lot of the new JavaScript now – features such as the following, for example:

\r\n\r\n

Classes
Modules
Arrow functions
Rest parameters
Default parameter values

\r\n\r\n

But wait, you say. How can I use ES6/ECMAScript® 2015 without worrying about browser support?

\r\n\r\n

4. Compile to ES3/ES5/ES6

\r\n\r\n

That’s right. It’s genius. With TypeScript, you can learn and use ES6, but compile down to ES5 or even ES3. And guess what. It all still works. Boom! TypeScript automatically changes your code for you. You can see this in action using the TypeScript Playground, which is shown below. In the Playground, you can enter TypeScript code on the left while watching how the TypeScript compiler transforms it on the right.

\r\n\r\n

$\"\"$

\r\n\r\n

You may be wondering: if TypeScript is compiled, how can I debug it at runtime using developer tools in my browser? Not a problem. There’s a source map generator in the TypeScript compiler, which will create .map files alongside your JavaScript files. These files tell your browser tooling how to map the compiled JavaScript to the original TypeScript .ts files. That means, for example, that in Chrome’s Developer Tools, you can find the .ts file under Sources, and place breakpoints.

\r\n\r\n

5. Generics

\r\n\r\n

TypeScript has the ability to define code templates, called generics, that can be reused throughout your codebase and that provide great functionality. C# and Java have a similar feature you may already be familiar with. Generics provide a lot more flexibility while working with types. As a developer, you can write code that allows for multiple, but limited types. With generics you get to say, “You can use multiple types here, but not anything under the sun. I’ll let you tell me which types you want to use when calling this code, but it needs to be either a string or number.” In other words, generics allow you to write code templates that can change depending on the context of use.

\r\n\r\n

To understand what I mean, take a look at the following class that simply manages a list of numbers.

\r\n\r\n

class ListOfNumbers {\r\n \r\n        _items: number[] = [];\r\n \r\n        add(item: number) {\r\n                this._items.push(item);\r\n        }\r\n \r\n        getItems(): number[] {\r\n                return this._items;\r\n        }\r\n \r\n}

\r\n\r\n

Now, suppose someone comes along, looks at this code and decides they need to do something very similar. They want to manage a list of strings in the same way, so they copy the code, paste it, and change it up a bit by replacing all the number types with string types, like so…

\r\n\r\n

class ListOfStrings {\r\n \r\n        _items: string[] = [];\r\n \r\n        add(item: string) {\r\n                this._items.push(item);\r\n        }\r\n \r\n        getItems(): string[] {\r\n                return this._items;\r\n        }\r\n \r\n}

\r\n\r\n

It has been said that duplicate code is the root of all evil in software design. This, being identical or nearly identical code, you might call it careless. If you’re in a bad mood, you might even say it’s just downright sloppy and unprofessional. Generics can help solve this by allowing the same class to handle both a list of numbers and a list of strings.

\r\n\r\n

An easy metaphor for understanding how this works is to look at a kind of template we’re all familiar with – a mail merge template:

\r\n\r\nDear \r\n\r\nWe have sent the info to

.\r\n\r\nThanks, \r\n\r\n

I can merge values into the placeholders for this template to get a unique letter for each person on my mailing list.

\r\n\r\n

Generics allow you to make code templates in a similar way. Of course, JavaScript functions already allow you to pass in different data values. Generics allow you to vary the actual data types that can be used with a function. They rely on “type” variables such as to define types in a generic template.

\r\n\r\n

With generics we can have just one function, which can be called with a specified type for the type variable. For example:

\r\n\r\nvar stringNumeric = new GenericNumber();\r\n\r\n

Or…

\r\n\r\nvar stringNumeric = new GenericNumber();\r\n\r\n

In summary, a generic is a code template that relies on type variables: . This allows you to create more generalized code while ensuring that it remains type-safe at compile time.

\r\n\r\n

6. Modules

\r\n\r\n

Modules are a way to organize code into buckets with namespaces (like package names in Java). In addition to helping you avoid naming conflicts, these buckets of code can encapsulate some general functionality that is then imported and reused across your project or in other projects.

\r\n\r\n

Historically, JavaScript wasn’t often used to build very large, sophisticated applications with several dependencies and a large set of files. As it has increased in popularity and as people now use it to build sophisticated single-page apps like GMail or Office 365 Web, the need for modularity has become increasingly clear. Managing such apps without modularity is a royal pain.

\r\n\r\n

To ease this pain, you can use internal modules in TypeScript, which help you organize your code. You can also use external modules (CommonJS or AMD loading), which in addition to helping you organize code, allow you to encapsulate and share reusable functionality.

\r\n\r\n

If you use Gulp, you’ve already used modules. Gulp and other Node.js applications use CommonJS to require and import modules:

\r\n\r\nvar gulp = require('gulp-uglify');\r\n\r\n

7. Interfaces

\r\n\r\n

You’ve heard the old programming best practice: alway program to an interface, not an implementation. Interfaces allow us to define a certain set of rules that classes must follow when they implement the interface. In this way, classes can be more easily swapped without breaking existing code and your objects can be more loosely coupled.

\r\n\r\n

JavaScript doesn’t inherently support the use of interfaces, so again, TypeScript comes to the rescue – giving us a way to define the contract for a class, what members of the interface must be implemented, and optional members.

\r\n\r\n

Following is a TypeScript example of the interface for a class and the class itself.

\r\n\r\n

interface IClock {\r\n    currentTime: Date;\r\n}\r\n \r\nclass Clock implements IClock {\r\n    currentTime: Date;\r\n    constructor(h: number, m: number) { }\r\n}

\r\n\r\n

Conclusion

\r\n\r\n

In this post, I’ve shown you just 7 out of more reasons why TypeScript helps you kicks ass. Of course, you don’t have to kick ass. You can wait for ES6/ECMAScript® 2015 to become widely adopted and learn about it then. You can keep wrestling with runtime defects and debugging your code in a browser. You can stick with writing JavaScript purely in the functional form and miss out on object orientated benefits that have been enjoyed in other languages for years. You can write tons of big-ass JavaScript files that are difficult to understand and difficult to maintain. You can keep swimming with your nose just above the surface of the water.

\r\n\r\n

But not me. I like to kick ass.

","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"new-web-developer-toolkit-for-ibm-digital-experience","title":"New Web Developer Toolkit for IBM Digital Experience","description":"Learn how to automatically download components and presentation templates for editing offline using with the new Web Developer Toolkit for IBM Digital Experience.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2015-10-05T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

\n\t\t\n\t\t

https://github.com/codyburleson/ibm-dx-resources

","modified":"2021-05-07T18:42:06.188Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"better-error-messages-from-gulp-using-gulp-util","title":"Better Error Messages From Gulp Using Gulp-Util","description":"Learn about a Gulp plugin that can help you coax more troubleshooting info out of errors.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-gulpjs.svg","created":"2015-09-11T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Gulp is a streaming build system that can help automate and enhance your workflow. For example, at Base22, in one of our composite tasks, we use Gulp to create a directory structure, compile Less into standard CSS, copy static dependencies, minify JavaScript, compress images, run a simple HTTP server, and then watch for subsequent changes to files while we’re working. Gulp is easy to install, easy to learn, easy to configure, and I love it. But when it happens to bomb on a problem, it doesn’t always log information that you can actually make sense of. Luckily, there’s a Gulp plugin that can help you coax more troubleshooting info out of these errors.

\n\n

Take the following Gulp error message, for example:

\n\n

Example Problem – Useless Error Message

\n\n

events.js:85\n      throw er; // Unhandled 'error' event\n            ^\nError\n    at new Parser (C:\\git\\frontend\\node_modules\\gulp-less\\node_modules\\less\\lib\\less\\parser.js:333:27)\n    at Object.less.render (C:\\git\\frontend\\node_modules\\gulp-less\\node_modules\\less\\lib\\less\\index.js:18:22)

\n\n\n

Pretty useless. The only thing one can discern from the error is that it has something to do with the less parser. But what? Who the #$@% knows.

\n\n

But what if you could get the following instead?

\n\n

Example Solution: Improved Error Message

\n\n

[15:52:20] { [Error: Unrecognised input in file C:\\git\\frontend\\dev\\less\\theme.less line no. 2449]\n  type: 'Parse',\n  message: 'Unrecognised input in file C:\\\\git\\\\frontend\\\\dev\\\\less\\\\theme.less line no. 2449',\n  filename: 'C:\\\\git\\\\frontend\\\\dev\\\\less\\\\theme.less',\n  index: 45319,\n  line: 2449,\n  callLine: NaN,\n  callExtract: undefined,\n  column: 17,\n  extract:\n   [ ' .btn-main-green {background-color: #7AB642; color:white; }',\n     ' .btn-main-green: {background-color: #7AB642; color:white; }',\n     ' .btn-main-green:hover {background-color: #2B872B; color:white;}' ],\n  lineNumber: 2449,\n  fileName: 'C:\\\\git\\\\frontend\\\\dev\\\\less\\\\theme.less',\n  ...etc...

\n\n

This error message is much improved. It tells us exactly which less file is failing the parser. It also tells us the precise failing line number, and it even gives us an extract of the CSS around that line number. Without even opening the file, we can see the erroneous colon after the CSS class, .btn-main-green: {.

\n\n

How To…

\n\n

The answer to this problem lies in the gulp-util plugin.

\n\n

Install the plugin and also add it to your package.json file with the following command:

\n\n

npm install --save-dev gulp-util

\n\n

Next, add the following declaration to the top of your gulp.js file:

\n\n

var gutil = require('gulp-util');

\n\n

Finally, attach the following error handler to tasks (when you are compiling less, uglifying some code, or whatever):

\n\n

.pipe(less().on('error', gutil.log))

\n\n

or…

\n\n

.pipe(uglify().on('error', gutil.log))

\n\n

With this little gem, you can now spend less time troubleshooting errors and more time creating works of art.

\n","modified":"2021-05-07T18:32:10.573Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"identifying-large-objects-consuming-memory-in-java-heap","title":"Identifying Large Objects Consuming Memory in the Java Heap","description":"Learn to identify large objects that were filling up the Java heap with this simple JVM argument.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-java.svg","created":"2015-03-20T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

Recently, we experienced some excessive memory consumption that was leading our servers into an out-of-memory\n\t\t\t(OOM) condition. To troubleshoot the issue, we needed a way to identify any large objects that were filling\n\t\t\tup the heap. As it turns out, there’s a JVM argument for this.

\n\n\t\t

Generic JVM argument: -Xdump:stack:events=allocation,filter

\n\n\t\t

If you set this option, whenever an allocation request is made for an object greater than or equal to the\n\t\t\tgiven size, the Java stack trace corresponding to the thread requesting the allocation is printed into the\n\t\t\tstandard error log. From this stack trace, you can easily see which actual Java class is eating up all your\n\t\t\tmemory. For example, the following setting will print the stack information for all allocations over 10\n\t\t\tmegabytes to the native_stderr.log:

\n\n\t\t

-Xdump:stack:events=allocation,filter=#10m

\n\n\t\t

You can also view an allocation within a certain range of values. The following, for example, will print the\n\t\t\tstack information for all allocations between 2m and 4m to the native_stderr.log

\n\n\t\t

-Xdump:stack:events=allocation,filter=#2m..4m

\n\n\t\t

You can read more about this in the following IBM technote:

\n\n\t\t

Identifying the Java stack\n\t\t\t\tof a thread making an allocation request larger than a certain size

","modified":"2021-05-08T00:23:21.324Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"string-replace-helper-for-dust-js","title":"String Replace Helper for Dust.js","description":"Steal this String Replace helper that can be used within a Dust rendering template.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-javascript.svg","created":"2014-10-24T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Recently, I’ve been learning about the LinkedIn fork of Dust – a client-side templating solution. Dust allows you to create helpers, which are functions that can be called from within a rendering template. They help separate presentation from logic, which is always a good practice.

\n\n

Today we created a String Replace helper, which seems like it might be pretty useful for others, so I thought I’d share it.

\n\n

Following is an example of the helper in use. In this example, the replace helper will replace all instances of a period character with a hyphen in the given message string, and then it will write the trimmed result.

\n\n

Usage example:

\n\n {@replace str=\"{message}\" search=\".\" replace=\"-\" trim=\"true\" /}\n\n

Here is the Replace Helper for Dust (also on GitHub Gist)

\n\n

(function (dust) {\n \n /**\n  * Polyfill to create String.trim() if it's not natively available\n  */\n if (!String.prototype.trim) {\n     (function(){\n         // Make sure we trim BOM and NBSP\n         var rtrim = /^[\\\\s\\\\uFEFF\\\\xA0]+|[\\\\s\\\\uFEFF\\\\xA0]+$/g;\n         String.prototype.trim = function () {\n             return this.replace(rtrim, "");\n         }\n     })();\n }\n\n /**\n  * Processes the given string to escape special meta characters used within\n  * Regular Expressions. This is used by the replace helper.\n  */\n function escapeRegExp(string) {\n     return string.replace(/([.*+?^=!:$\\{\\}()|\\\\[\\\\]\\\\/\\\\\\\\])/g, "\\\\\\\\$1");\n }\n\n /**\n  * Performs a global search and replace within a string.\n  * In the following example, we replace all periods in the\n  * message string with dashes and we trim the result.\n  *\n  * {@replace str="{message}" search="." replace="-" trim="true" /}\n  *\n  * str - the input string within which the search and replace will be performed\n  * search - the character or sequence to search\n  * replace - the character or sequence used to replace\n  * trim - when 'true', will trim the string before returning result.\n  *\n  */\n dust.helpers.replace = function (chunk, ctx, bodies, params) {\n\n     var str = dust.helpers.tap(params.str, chunk, ctx);\n     var search = dust.helpers.tap(params.search, chunk, ctx);\n     var replace = dust.helpers.tap(params.replace, chunk, ctx);\n     var trim = dust.helpers.tap(params.trim, chunk, ctx);\n\n     if(trim && trim == 'true') {\n         str = str.trim();\n     }\n\n     var result = str.replace(new RegExp(escapeRegExp(search), 'g'), replace);\n\n     return chunk.write( result );\n\n }\n\n})(typeof exports !== 'undefined' ? module.exports = require('dustjs-linkedin') : dust);

","modified":"2021-05-07T18:45:49.959Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"how-to-start-a-simple-http-server-from-any-folder-on-a-mac","title":"How to Start a Simple HTTP Server From Any Folder on a Mac","description":"Here’s a simple command that will startup an HTTP server from any given folder on a Mac.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-apple.svg","created":"2014-10-23T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

Here’s a simple command that will startup an HTTP server from any given folder on a Mac. Open Terminal, cd to change to the directory you wish to serve files from, and then execute the following command.

\n\n

python -m SimpleHTTPServer 8000

\n\n

This can be very handy for web development on a Mac; especially when using the Google Chrome web browser, which doesn’t allow you to run JavaScript from your filesystem. Even if you bypass Chrome’s restriction by starting it with the –allow-file-access-from-files parameter, there can be cases where a web server is still desired. For example, when using Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS) for cross-domain Ajax, the browser needs to report its origin with an HTTP request. When served by the web server, Origin will report http://localhost:8000 rather than null or file://.

\n\n

Python 3.x+ releases

\n\n

If you’re a Mac Python user who has installed or updated to Python 3, then you’ll find the traditional command string from the prior Python versions does not work to initiate the web server in new Python 3.x+ releases. For Python 3.x+, use the following instead:

\n\n

python -m http.server

\n\n

OR (depending on how Python 3.x is installed and named):

\n\n

python3 -m http.server

","modified":"2021-05-07T18:46:21.321Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"meet-iife-the-quintessential-javascript-closure","title":"Meet IIFE - the Quintessential JavaScript Closure","description":"If you don't know this, you don't know JavaScript.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-javascript.svg","created":"2014-10-23T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

If you want to call yourself a JavaScript bad-ass, then there is at least one little code pattern you should know by heart: the Immediately Invoked Function Expression (IIFE). This pattern defines a function that is executed immediately and it looks like this:

\n\n(function () {\n alert("Hello world, I'm an IIFE!");\n}());\n\n

This is an important pattern primarily because it provides a closure for initialization code, which allows you to keep temporary variables out of the global scope. That is to say, it encloses code in a function that acts as a scope wrapper or sandbox and that is executed immediately after it’s created. I find it easier to remember this pattern by breaking it down into the following steps…

\n\n

JavaScript IIFE in 4 simple steps

\n\n

Define a function using a function expression.
\n function() {};
Add a set of parentheses at the end, which causes the function to be executed immediately.
\n function() {}();
Wrap the whole function in parentheses.This is required because we’re not assigning the function to a variable.
\n (function() {}());
Write the function body.…in the usual spot between the curly braces.
\n(function () {\n alert("Hello world, I'm an IIFE!");\n}());

\n\n

You can use this pattern any time you need to create a scope sandbox. You can also use it instead of jQuery’s $( document ).ready() when you’re actually able to follow the best-practice of loading render-blocking scripts last. You will almost certainly use this pattern when creating your own reusable JavaScript library or framework. When using an IIFE in your own library, you will likely use a more complex form – passing in parameters. In an upcoming post, I’ll show you how to do that, so stay tuned.

\n\n

POST-PUBLISH NOTE: See Jason Knight's interesting notes about alternatives now provided with let/const: We No Longer Need IIFE? Let/Const To The Rescue!

\n","modified":"2022-03-11T17:21:19.682Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"Default","ogImage":"","subtitle":""},{"_id":"eclipse-tip-format-source-code-on-save","title":"Eclipse Tip - Format Source Code on Save","description":"How to force Eclipse (or any Eclipse-based IDE) to format source code automatically on Save.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-eclipse.svg","created":"2014-09-18T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

Pressing CTRL + SHIFT + F in the Eclipse editor will automatically format source code according to the default or specific formatter preference settings. However, if team members do not format consistently before committing code, relevant changes can become difficult to identify amongst code style changes. One way to alleviate this problem is to force Eclipse (or any Eclipse-based IDE) to format source code automatically on Save. Here’s how…

\n\n

You can set this behavior globally or on a per-project basis. I would recommend that you enforce it at the project level since you can’t be sure that other developers will keep the global setting turned on. This will work in Eclipse or any Eclipse-based IDE such as Rational Application Developer or the Spring Tools Suite.

\n\n

Project specific settings

\n\n

Right-click on any project in the workspace and select Properties.
In the Project Properties dialog, expand Java Editor and then click Save Actions.
Check Enable project specific settings.
Check Format source code and Organize imports.
Click Apply and OK.

\n\n

Global settings

\n\n

Select Window > Preferences in the application menu.
In the Preferences dialog, expand Java > Editor and then click on Save Actions.
Check Perform the selected actions on save.
Check Format source code and Organize imports.
Click Apply and OK.

","modified":"2021-06-01T14:53:38.482Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"a-javascript-implementation-of-java-util-map","title":"A JavaScript Implementation of java.util.Map","description":"Maps are now available as a part of the ECMAScript 2015 (ES6) standard, so this post is now outdated.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-javascript.svg","created":"2014-06-02T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-08T00:19:42.946Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

$\"\"$ As a Java developer, I use a lot of maps – especially instances of HashMap. A map is a dictionary or lookup table that contains key/value pairs. It provides a very convenient way to cache objects for easy retrieval by some identifier such as a string (the key). It’s so convenient, in fact, that I find myself struggling without a JavaScript equivalent, so I wrote one. Following is a partial JavaScript implementation of the java.util.Map interface, which you are free to copy and use.

\n\n

Before using this map, please be advised that maps are now available as a part of the ECMAScript 2015 (ES6) standard. See: https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/JavaScript/Reference/Global_Objects/Map

\n\n

JavaScript Map usage example

\n\n

As you can see from the example below, using this map is just like using a map in Java.

\n\n

var myMap = new Map();\nmyMap.put('myKey1',"Hello World!");\nmyMap.put('myKey2',{'prop1':'How','prop2':' are you?'});\n \nconsole.log( myMap.get('myKey1') );\nconsole.log( myMap.get('myKey2').prop1 + myMap.get('myKey2').prop2);

JavaScript Map

\n\n

* An object that maps keys to values. A map cannot contain duplicate keys; each key can map to at most one value.\n* For those familiar with the Java programming language, this is similar to a HashMap; it implements most of the\n* methods defined by Java's java.util.Map interface.\n*\n* @constructor\n* @version 1.1.0\n* @author cody@base22.com Burleson, Cody\n*/\n \nfunction Map() {\n \n    this.dict = {};\n     \n    /**\n    * Returns the number of key-value mappings in this map.\n    * @method\n    */\n \n    this.size = function() {\n        return Object.keys(this.dict).length;\n    };\n \n    /**\n    * Returns true if this map contains no key-value mappings.\n    * @method\n    */\n    this.isEmpty = function() {\n        return Object.keys(this.dict).length == 0;\n    };\n \n    /**\n    * Returns the value to which the specified key is mapped, or null if this map contains no mapping for the key.\n    * @method\n    */\n    this.get = function(key){\n        return this.dict[key];\n    };\n \n    /**\n    * Returns true if this map contains a mapping for the specified key.\n    * @method\n    */\n    this.containsKey = function(key){\n        if( this.get(key) !== undefined) {\n            return true;\n        } else {\n            return false;\n        }\n    };\n \n    /**\n    * Associates the specified value with the specified key in this map. If the map previously contained a mapping for the key, the old value is replaced.\n    * @method\n    */\n    this.put = function(key,value) {\n        this.dict[key] = value;\n    };\n \n    /**\n    * Removes the mapping for the specified key from this map if present.\n    * @method\n    */\n    this.remove = function(key) {\n        'use strict';\n        delete this.dict[key];\n    };\n \n    /**\n    * Removes all of the mappings from this map. The map will be empty after this call returns.\n    * @method\n    */\n    this.clear = function(){\n        this.dict = {};\n    };\n     \n    /**\n     * Executes the given callback for each entry in this map until all entries have been processed.\n     * The given callback will be passed a map entry as parameter. So, for example...\n     *\n     * function myCallback(mapEntryItem) {\n     *      console.log('I will process this item: ' + mapEntryItem.text);\n     * }\n     *\n     * myMap.forEach(myCallback);\n     *\n     * @method\n     */\n \n    this.forEach = function(callback) {\n        var len = this.size();\n        for (i = 0; i < len; i++) {\n            var item = this.get( Object.keys(this.dict)[i] );\n            callback(item);\n        }\n    }\n}

\n\n

Test Class

\n\n

/**\n* =============================\n* Map Test Cases\n* =============================\n*/\n \n/**\n* Useful for unit testing JavaScript, this method asserts that the given condition is true.\n* If the given condition is not true, an optionally provided message is logged or 'Assertion failed.'\n* @method\n*/\nfunction assert(condition, message) {\n    if (!condition) {\n        console.error(message) || console.error('Assertion failed');\n    } else {\n        console.log("-- PASS");\n    }\n}\n \n// Instantiate a new Dictionary object...\nvar myMap = new Map();\n \n// Test that isEmpty returns true at this point\nassert( myMap.isEmpty() );\n \n// Test that size is zero at this point\nassert( myMap.size() == 0 , "size should be zero before any entries have been put into the lookup table.");\n \n// Put a sim0le string value in the dictionary and then test for it\n \nmyMap.put('key1','http://value1?dt=2014_06_01&dummy=true');\n \n// Now let's test adding a different kind of object...\nvar testObj = {prop1:"Hello", prop2:" World!"};\nmyMap.put('key2',testObj);\n \n// Test that size now equals one\nassert( myMap.size() == 2, "size should be 2 after adding 2 entries.");\n \nvar ref = myMap.get('key2');\n \n// Test that ref was fetched from the dictionary\nassert( ref !== undefined , "ref should not be undefined; it should be a reference to testObj");\n \n// Test a property of the fetched object; just to show there is support for more than just string types\nassert( ref.prop1 == 'Hello' , "ref.prop1 should equal 'hello' ");\n \n// Show that containsKey is false when there is no matching key\nassert( myMap.containsKey('notReal') == false, "containsKey('notReal') should return false; no such object is in the lookup table.");\n \n// Show that containsKey is true when there is a matching object found\nassert( myMap.containsKey('key2') == true, "containsKey('key2') should return true; that object is in the lookup table.");\n \n// Now, we remove an item to test the remove() method\nmyMap.remove('key1');\nassert( myMap.size() == 1 , "size should be 1 after removing item under 'key1'.");\n \n// Finally, test the clear()\nmyMap.clear();\nassert( myMap.size() == 0 , "size should be 0 after clearing lookup table.");

\n\n

JavaScript Map API

\n\n

Map

\n\n

new Map()

\n\n

An object that maps keys to values. A map cannot contain duplicate keys; each key can map to at most one value. For those familiar with the Java programming language, this is similar to a HashMap; it implements most of the methods defined by Java’s java.util.Map interface.

\n\n

Methods

\n\n

clear()

\n\n

Removes all of the mappings from this map. The map will be empty after this call returns.

\n\n

containsKey(key)

\n\n

Returns true if this map contains a mapping for the specified key. Parameters:

\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Name	Type	Description
key	String	key whose presence in this map is to be tested

\n\n

forEach(callback)

\n\n

Executes the given callback for each entry in this map until all entries have been processed. The given callback will be passed a map entry as parameter. So, for example…

\n\n

function myCallback(mapEntryItem) {\n     console.log('I will process this item: ' + mapEntryItem.text);\n}\n \nmyMap.forEach(myCallback);

\n\n

Parameters:

\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Name	Type	Description
callback	function	The callback function that will be called for each entry in the map and which will be passed the value for each entry in the map.

\n\n

isEmpty()

\n\n

Returns true if this map contains no key-value mappings.

\n\n

put(key, value)

\n\n

Associates the specified value with the specified key in this map. If the map previously contained a mapping for the key, the old value is replaced.

\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Name	Type	Description
key	String	key with which the specified value is to be associated
value	Object	value to be associated with the specified key

\n\n

remove(key)

\n\n

Removes the mapping for the specified key from this map if present.

\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Name	Type	Description
key	String	key whose mapping is to be removed from the map

\n\n

size()

\n\n

Returns the number of key-value mappings in this map.

\n\n

Gist on GitHub

\n\n

https://gist.github.com/codyburleson/089157ed8eca114da8c4#file-javascript-map

","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"improve-your-rational-or-eclipse-based-ides-spelling-dictionary","title":"Improve Your Rational or Eclipse-Based IDE's Spelling Dictionary","description":"How to add a user defined dictionary for your IDE's spelling checker.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-eclipse.svg","created":"2013-12-30T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

I was the guy in middle school who raised his hand in class just to point out a spot on the chalkboard missed\n\t\t\tby the teacher’s eraser. Little things like that don’t bother most people, but for me, they stand out like a\n\t\t\tturd in a punch bowl. If I'm writing in ink and I scratch out just one word in my notebook, I want to rip\n\t\t\tout the whole damn page. You know what I mean? Then you probably feel the same about those squiggly red\n\t\t\tlines in the editor of your Rational or Eclipse-based IDE. They’re supposed to indicate misspelled words,\n\t\t\twhich is totally useful, but when they flag words that are actually spelled correctly, it annoys me to all\n\t\t\thell. For those who share this compulsive dread, I’ve found a cure…

\n\n\t\t

How to add a user defined dictionary for your IDE’s spelling checker

\n\n\t\t

Prepare a simple text file with one word on each line. Here are two properly spelled words that Eclipse\n\t\t\t\tis unaware of in the English (United States) platform dictionary, for example: interoperability and\n\t\t\t\tutilitarian.
Select menu, Window > Preferences
Within the options tree of the Preferences dialog, expand and select General > Editors > Text\n\t\t\t\tEditors > Spelling
You should see the view that follows. Click Browse… and navigate to find the text file you’ve prepared.\n\t\t\t
Click Apply and then OK to dismiss the preferences dialog. You may have to re-open editors to initialize\n\t\t\t\tnewly added words, or in some cases, restart the IDE.

\n\n\t\t

","modified":"2021-06-01T04:47:50.436Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"how-to-find-large-images-and-files-in-ibm-wcm","title":"How to Find Large Images and Files in IBM WCM","description":"How to use the FindLargeResources module to perform an audit for large files in WCM.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2013-12-04T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

$\"WebSphere$ Even though you can limit the maximum size of the resources that can be\n uploaded in WCM, you may still wish to perform an occasional audit for large files. The FindLargeResources\n module, developed for APAR PK75187 (going back to Portal 6.1.0.4), was created for such a task.

\n\n

WHY?

\n\n

Users can experience poor performance when viewing large resources that have been uploaded into Image, File,\n and Rich Text Components (including the Ephox EditLive!). You may wish to periodically review large items in\n an effort to improve user experience. For example, you may have a content author who is uploading\n unnecessarily high-res images that needs to be identified and educated.

\n\n

You could use the WCM API to determine the size of images for Image and File Components, but that would be\n very slow because each item would have to be retrieved individually. Furthermore, there is no API tool to\n find the size of embedded images in Rich Text fields. So, the FindLargeResources module fills these gaps.\n

\n\n

HOW?

\n\n

The following lines should be added to the WCMConfigService.properties file in <Portal\n directory>/wcm/shared/app/config/wcmservices

\n\n

connect.businesslogic.module.findlargeresources.class=com.ibm.workplace.wcm.services.statistics.FindLargeResourcesModule\nconnect.businesslogic.module.findlargeresources.remoteaccess=true\nconnect.businesslogic.module.findlargeresources.autoload=false\n

\n\n

Also, append findlargeresources to this key: ‘connect.businesslogic.module’

\n\n

For example:

\n\n

\nconnect.businesslogic.module=template,multi_template,web,mail,form,aggregator,default,ajpe,federatedproxy,ajpecatselect,memberfixer,versioningenablement,workflowenablement,itemdispatcher,plutouploadfile,plutodownloadfile,ensureusermanagement,pdmproxy,synd,subs,syndication,refreshallitems,unlocklibrary,findlargeresources,custom\n

\n\n

Restart the server for the changes to take effect. You should then be able to execute the module by entering\n a URL in your browser, similar to the following:

\n\n

http://<serverName>:/wps/wcm/connect?MOD=FindLargeResources[&min_size=]

\n\n

The module will find all Image File and Rich Text Component’s resources that are greater than the minimum\n size specified by the “min_size” parameter (in bytes). If no size is specified, it will look by default for\n resources greater then 1 Mb. For Rich Text Components, it will not find resources that are less than 2 Mbs.\n

\n\n

The result will output each resource item’s name, path, type and size.

","modified":"2021-05-07T18:47:53.516Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"fix-validation-errors-when-using-renderrequest-in-a-jsp","title":"Fix Annoying Validation Errors When Using RenderRequest in a JSP","description":"How to fix renderRequest cannot be resolved validation errors in your IDE.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-java.svg","created":"2013-11-08T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

When you use renderRequest, renderResponse, and portletConfig objects in a JSP, your Rational or Eclipse-based IDE will usually give a validation error – \"renderRequest cannot be resolved,\" for example. Having red-x validation errors in your IDE is annoying as all-hell, so here’s a nice work-around for that…

\n\n

<%@ page import="javax.portlet.RenderRequest" %>\n<%@ taglib uri="http://java.sun.com/portlet" prefix="portlet"%>\n  \n<%!\nRenderRequest renderRequest;\n%>\n  \n<portlet:defineObjects />\n  \n<%--\nString portletSiteArea = renderRequest.getPreferences().getValue("sitearea", "");\n// code...\n--%>

\n\n

Lines 1 and 2 represent the area atop your JSP where you do your imports and taglib references. I've put those two in because we're using both in the code that follows.
Line 5 is the key. We’re declaring the the renderRequest object so that our IDE will shut up and stop telling us it cannot be resolved.
Line 8 is important – it’s the tag that establishes the renderRequest, renderResponse, and portletConfig objects so that you can access them in your JSP. It is crucially important to ensure this tag always comes after your declaration of any of those javax.portlet objects. When the <portlet:defineObjects /> tag does its thing, the objects you declared will be overridden by the real deal.
Line 11 is just a random example showing how you might be using the object in your code to do some real work. The renderRequest instance in that line would normally get a squiggly red underline.

\n\n

Happy coding! (Unless you’re on a death-march – to which I can only say: hang in there, buddy.)

","modified":"2021-05-07T18:48:18.143Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"touch-all-items-in-a-wcm-library","title":"How to Touch All Items in a WCM Library","description":"Learn about the role and capabilities of a WCM Library in this 10 minute Lunch Byte video.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2013-10-03T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

Occasionally, you may find yourself with the need\n\t\t\tto “touch” (force a SAVE operation) on every item in a given WCM library. For example, we recently had some\n\t\t\tenvironmental issues that left us with a pretty large sum of taxonomy categories that did not syndicate.\n\t\t\tAfter recreating the syndicator/subscriber pair, we could get individual categories to syndicate by\n\t\t\t“touching” them on the source server. But there were far too many to touch by hand. Before you go running\n\t\t\ttowards the API to build a custom utility for such a task, consider first, the RefreshAllItems module.

\n\n\t\t

The RefreshAllItems module was introduced in APAR PK31637, which goes all the way back to IBM WebSphere\n\t\t\tPortal and IBM Web Content Manager 6.0.0.1. Once it is configured for use, it is invoked by hitting a\n\t\t\tspecific URL that tells the WCM servlet to fire the module on a given library. The URL looks like this:

\n\n\t\t

http://<serverName>:<serverPort>/wps/wcm/connect?MOD=RefreshAllItems[&library=<libName>][&preserve_dates=true]\n\t\t

\n\n\t\t

In addition to forcing many items to syndicate because they’ve been touched, this module can help fix\n\t\t\treferential integrity issues (which are less and less common as you migrate up from WebSphere Portal 6 into\n\t\t\tsuccessive versions, by the way). At one point in time, for example, IBM released a fix that stores WCM\n\t\t\tcontent in a new, performance-enhanced format. Legacy content is only converted to the new format when it is\n\t\t\tsaved. So, this module provides a way to sweep an entire library and “upgrade” the legacy content.

\n\n\t\t

Now, I know I don’t have to tell you not to execute a utility like this in a production system during peak\n\t\t\thours. By nature, it’s going to use up some CPU and then, consequently, fill up quite a bit of syndication\n\t\t\tbandwidth (depending on your library size).

\n\n\t\t

Until next time, enjoy your work and evolve the Web!

","modified":"2021-05-07T18:48:49.978Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"accessing-the-authenticated-websphere-portal-user-from-a-separate-web-app","title":"Accessing the Authenticated WebSphere Portal User From a Separate Web App","description":"How to share a security context between WebSphere Portal and a custom web app deployed on the same server.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2013-09-21T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

$\"WebSphere$ Recently, I had trouble sharing a security context between WebSphere Portal and a custom web app deployed on the same server. It was for a mobile app that provides a JSON/XML REST API to content and services from Portal 6.1.5. For this to work, we needed the currently authenticated portal user, but since it was a separate web app deployed on the app server, and not a portlet or set of resources deployed within the portal, it was a challenge. This post illustrates the challenge and a solution.

\n\n

If the user was logged in to the portal, I expected to get a name for the Principal from the HTTPServletRequest object using the following code:

\n\n

Principal principal = (Principal) request.getUserPrincipal();\nif(principal != null) {\n     System.out.println("username: " + principal.getName());\n} else {\n     System.out.println("Principal is null!");\n}

\n\n

But, this did not work. The Principal was null. And of course, I couldn’t get what I needed using the Portal User Management Architecture (PUMA) either using code similar to the following…

\n\n

String userCnFromPuma = null;\nPumaHome home = null;\ntry {\n    // ------------------------------------------\n    // Stuff like this should really be done in\n    // an init method of a service singleton\n    // because JNDI lookups are expensive...\n    Context ctx = new InitialContext();\n    String myjndiname = PumaHome.JNDI_NAME;\n    home = (PumaHome) ctx.lookup(myjndiname);\n    // ------------------------------------------------------------------------\n\n    Map map=null;   \n    if(home!=null){\n\n        PumaProfile pp = home.getProfile(request);\n\n        if(pp!=null){\n            List attribNames = new ArrayList();\n            attribNames.add("cn");\n            map = pp.getAttributes(pp.getCurrentUser(),attribNames);\n            userCnFromPuma = (String)map.get("cn");\n            if(userCnFromPuma != null) {\n                    System.out.println("userCnFromPuma: " + userCnFromPuma);\n            } else {\n                    System.out.println("userCnFromPuma from PUMA is null!");\n            }\n        }\n\n    }else{\n            System.out.println("PumaHome is null!");\n    }\n} catch (Exception e) {\n        e.printStackTrace();\n        System.out.println("Exception occurred while looking up PuamHome");\n}

\n\n

Following is a solution…

\n\n

Add security roles and bindings to the deployment descriptor for the EAR

\n\n

Modify the deployment descriptor (application.xml) for the EAR project, which is the wrapper to your web app’s module (WAR) in Rational. Add an "Everyone Role" and then check Everyone in the WebSphere Bindings.

\n\n

Add an "All Role" and check All authenticated users in the WebSphere Bindings.

\n\n

And for good measure, added a "No Role" and leave all the WebSphere Bindings unchecked for that role.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

After making these changes, the source of your application.xml file should look something like this:

\n\n

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>\n<application id="Application_ID" version="1.4" xmlns="http://java.sun.com/xml/ns/j2ee" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:schemaLocation="http://java.sun.com/xml/ns/j2ee http://java.sun.com/xml/ns/j2ee/application_1_4.xsd">\n    <display-name>mywebappEAR</display-name>\n    <module id="WebModule_1377797584294">\n        <web>\n            <web-uri>mywebapp.war</web-uri>\n            <context-root>wps/mywebapp</context-root>\n        </web>\n    </module>\n    <security-role id="SecurityRole_1379706420653">\n        <description>Everyone in the enterprise.</description>\n        <role-name>Everyone Role</role-name>\n    </security-role>\n    <security-role id="SecurityRole_1379706420654">\n        <description>All Authenticated users in the enterprise.</description>\n        <role-name>All Role</role-name>\n    </security-role>\n    <security-role>\n        <description>No users in the enterprise.</description>\n        <role-name>No Role</role-name>\n    </security-role>\n</application>

\n\n

Add auth constraints to the deployment descriptor for the WAR

\n \n

Finally, added auth constraints to the deployment descriptor for the WAR. That is to say – modify the WEB-INF/web.xml file in the dynamic web app project by adding the following:

\n\n

<security-constraint id="SecurityConstraint_1">\n    <web-resource-collection id="WebResourceCollection_1">\n        <web-resource-name/>\n        <url-pattern>/*</url-pattern>\n        <http-method>DELETE</http-method>\n        <http-method>GET</http-method>\n        <http-method>POST</http-method>\n        <http-method>PUT</http-method>\n        <http-method>HEAD</http-method>\n    </web-resource-collection>\n    <auth-constraint id="AuthConstraint_1">\n        <description/>\n        <role-name>All Role</role-name>\n    </auth-constraint>\n    <user-data-constraint id="UserDataConstraint_4">\n        <transport-guarantee>NONE</transport-guarantee>\n    </user-data-constraint>\n</security-constraint>\n\n<security-role id="SecurityRole_1">\n    <description>Everyone role</description>\n    <role-name>Everyone Role</role-name>\n</security-role>\n<security-role id="SecurityRole_2">\n    <description>All role</description>\n    <role-name>All Role</role-name>\n</security-role>\n<security-role id="SecurityRole_3">\n    <description>No role</description>\n    <role-name>No Role</role-name>\n</security-role>

\n\n

The HTTP methods you wish to protect with the transport-guarantee are up to you. In my case, I used the very same settings as what is defined for the “/myportal” path in WebSphere Portal.

\n\n

Final results

\n\n

After having added the security (auth) constraints, I established an authenticated session by logging in to the portal. I then entered the URL of the web app and was able to see that the Principal from the HTTPServletRequest was no longer returning null; principal.getName() returned the name of the user I authenticated with. The PUMA code also returned the common name (cn) of the user. When I did not establish an authenticated session and I tried to access the web app, I was routed by WebSeal to the portal login, which is exactly what I wanted.

\n\n

Side Note

\n\n

A colleague informed me that there is a way to bypass the need to define web-app specific security (auth) constraints. He said…

\n\n

There’s also a setting in the WAS Admin console you can use, under the security administration stuff, for “use available authentication” … this will tell WAS to build a security context around a request to your web app if it can, regardless of whether your request URL has security constraints on it or not.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

I elected not to use this feature since it seems to me that it’s better to explicitly define security constraints for each app than relax the restriction overall. But, nevertheless, it may also be handy to have noted.

","modified":"2021-10-18T19:26:52.023Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":"","ogImage":""},{"_id":"getting-parts-of-a-url-from-the-httpservletrequest-object","title":"Getting Parts of a URL From the HttpServletRequest Object","description":"Example Java code and example output values for getter methods on the HttpServletRequest object.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-eclipse.svg","created":"2013-09-18T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-06-02T20:21:52.730Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

When I’m not quite sure how to get exactly what I need out of the request URL, I write some stanza that spits out the value of just about every relevant getter method on the javax.servlet.http.HttpServletRequest object. I’ve done this more than once. You know what I’m talking about? It goes something like this:

\n\n

@RequestMapping(value="/root/**", method = RequestMethod.POST)\npublic void handlePost(Model model,HttpServletRequest request, HttpServletResponse response) {\n \n    StringBuilder sb = new StringBuilder();\n    sb.append(" [");\n    sb.append("\\n\\t ContextPath: ").append(request.getContextPath());\n    sb.append("\\n\\t LocalAddr: ").append(request.getLocalAddr());\n    sb.append("\\n\\t LocalName: ").append(request.getLocalName());\n    sb.append("\\n\\t LocalPort: ").append(request.getLocalPort());\n    sb.append("\\n\\t PathInfo: ").append(request.getPathInfo());\n    sb.append("\\n\\t PathTranslated: ").append(request.getPathTranslated());\n    sb.append("\\n\\t Protocol: ").append(request.getProtocol());\n    sb.append("\\n\\t RemoteAddr: ").append(request.getRemoteAddr());\n    sb.append("\\n\\t RemoteHost: ").append(request.getRemoteHost());\n    sb.append("\\n\\t RemotePort: ").append(request.getRemotePort());\n    sb.append("\\n\\t RequestURI: ").append(request.getRequestURI());\n    sb.append("\\n\\t RequestURL: ").append(request.getRequestURL());\n    sb.append("\\n\\t Scheme: " ).append(request.getScheme());\n    sb.append("\\n\\t ServerName: ").append(request.getServerName());\n    sb.append("\\n\\t ServerPort: ").append(request.getServerPort());\n    sb.append("\\n\\t ServletPath: ").append(request.getServletPath());\n    sb.append("\\n]");\n \n    LOG.trace("-- handlePost() > interesting URL and URI related stuff from request object: " + sb.toString());\n \n}

\n\n

C’mon. You know you’ve done it more than once too, so just stop it with the smug smile.

I’m ashamed and sick of it, so this time, I’m dropping a breadcrumb for my future self by posting the output, which will give me a clue in some future date when my brain is wore to the core like it is tonight. As God is my witness, I will never, ever write this code stanza again. Here’s the output…

\n\n

1:07:18.650 [http-bio-8080-exec-3] TRACE c.b.c.controllers.LdpRestController - -- handlePost() > interesting URL and URI related stuff from request object: [\n    ContextPath: /myapp\n    LocalAddr: 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1\n    LocalName: 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1\n    LocalPort: 8080\n    PathInfo: /root/hello/world.jsp\n    PathTranslated: C:\\workspace-c\\.metadata\\.plugins\\org.eclipse.wst.server.core\\tmp0\\wtpwebapps\\myapp\\root\\hello\\world.jsp\n    Protocol: HTTP/1.1\n    RemoteAddr: 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1\n    RemoteHost: 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1\n    RemotePort: 49278\n    RequestURI: /myapp/abc/root/hello/world.jsp\n    RequestURL: http://localhost:8080/myapp/abc/root/hello/world.jsp\n    Scheme: http\n    ServerName: localhost\n    ServerPort: 8080\n    ServletPath: /abc\n]

","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"mapping-to-a-view-in-spring-when-no-controller-logic-is-required","title":"Mapping to a View in Spring When No Controller Logic is Required","description":"You don't need to write a Spring controller to map to a view when no controller logic is required. Here's how...","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-spring-framework.svg","created":"2013-07-20T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-07T18:49:56.044Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

I’ve always felt stupid for writing a simple Spring controller just to return a view when no controller logic is required. Turns out, I was right; there is a better way. So, okay. I was stupid, but now I know and here it is.

\n\n

Since Spring 3.0, you can use the following tag in your XML configuration:

\n\n<mvc:view-controller path="/" view-name="home"/>\n\n

That’s an example of a view-controller definition that forwards to a home page without any custom backing controller. The Spring 3.0 documentation describes the tag as follows:

\n\n

This tag is a shorcut for defining a ParameterizableViewController that immediately forwards to a view when invoked. Use it in static cases when there is no Java Controller logic to execute before the view generates the response.

\n\n

Following is an example of the full dispatcher-servlet.xml file that I’m using at the moment. You can see at the very bottom that I’ve mapped two of these. The path ‘/index’ routes to a FreeMarker view I’ve defined in an index.ftl file and the path ‘/about’ routes to another FreeMarker view defined in the file, about.ftl.

\n\n

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>\n<beans xmlns="http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans" \n     xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" \n     xmlns:p="http://www.springframework.org/schema/p" \n     xmlns:mvc="http://www.springframework.org/schema/mvc" \n     xmlns:context="http://www.springframework.org/schema/context" \n     xsi:schemaLocation=" http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans/spring-beans-3.0.xsd \n     http://www.springframework.org/schema/context http://www.springframework.org/schema/context/spring-context-3.0.xsd \n     http://www.springframework.org/schema/mvc http://www.springframework.org/schema/mvc/spring-mvc-3.0.xsd">\n \n        <!-- This must remain in place even if there are no uses of the properties loaded in this file because \n        it prepares the properties for use in Java classes. For example: @Value("$\\{ldp.installableDataPath\\}") \n        private String installableDataPath; -->\n        <context:property-placeholder location="classpath:/config.properties" />\n \n        <!-- Spring will search in the bellow paths controller an services annotations -->\n        <context:component-scan base-package="com.base22" />\n \n        <!-- The URL mapping definition -->\n        <bean class="org.springframework.web.servlet.mvc.annotation.DefaultAnnotationHandlerMapping" />\n \n        <bean class="org.springframework.web.servlet.mvc.annotation.AnnotationMethodHandlerAdapter"/>\n \n        <!-- freemarker config -->\n        <bean id="freemarkerConfig" class="org.springframework.web.servlet.view.freemarker.FreeMarkerConfigurer">\n                <property name="templateLoaderPath" value="/WEB-INF/ftl/" />\n        </bean>\n \n        <!-- View resolvers can also be configured with ResourceBundles or XML files. If you need different \n        view resolving based on Locale, you have to use the resource bundle resolver. -->\n        <bean id="viewResolver" class="org.springframework.web.servlet.view.freemarker.FreeMarkerViewResolver">\n                <property name="cache" value="true" />\n                <property name="prefix" value="" />\n                <property name="suffix" value=".ftl" />\n        </bean>\n \n        <!-- The following tags are shorcuts for defining a ParameterizableViewController that immediately forwards \n        to a view when invoked. They are used in static cases when there is no Java Controller logic to execute before \n        the view generates the response. -->\n        <mvc:view-controller path="/index" view-name="index" />\n        <mvc:view-controller path="/about" view-name="about" />\n \n</beans>

\n\n

If you prefer Java code configuration over XML files for Spring, you can do this:

\n\n

@Configuration\n@EnableWebMvc\npublic class WebConfig extends WebMvcConfigurerAdapter {\n \n  @Override\n  public void addViewControllers(ViewControllerRegistry registry) {\n    registry.addViewController("/").setViewName("home");\n  }\n \n}

","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"ia-files-005-navigation-breadth-and-depth","title":"The IA Files 5 - Navigation Breadth and Depth","description":"What navigation depth and breadth is ideal for usability? Here's some food for thought.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/webpage-icon.png","created":"2013-07-07T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

$\"\"$ In my previous post of the IA Files, I promised I would begin to share best practices for building effective website navigation systems. One “rule of thumb” at the top of my list relates to Navigation Breadth and Depth. The first part of this rule says that static navigation menus should not exceed 7 (plus or minus 2) items. The second rule says that the depth of static navigation systems should not exceed three levels. I propose that a 7/3 breadth/depth ratio provides a healthy set of parameters for IA’s to design navigation systems within.

\n\n

Navigation Breadth

\n\n

Miller’s Magical Number Seven, Plus or Minus Two

\n\n

So, there’s all kinds of stuff you can read about this Harvard professor dude named George Miller. Some might say that he kicked off the whole field of cognitive psychology. He won the American Psychological Foundation’s Life Achievement Award in 1990 and the National Medal of Science in 1991. Definitely the kind of guy you’d want to meet (supposing, say, you had a DeLorean with a flux capacitor; he died in 2012 at age 92).

\n\n

He did a bunch of studies, which demonstrated that most people could only retain about seven “chunks” of information in short term memory at any given time (words, numbers, names, etc). The actual numbers were about seven for numbers, six for letters and five for words. In the case of words, he also found that the amount that could be retained was a function of whether the words were known by the listener. The rules, he found, are different for long-term memory, however, where storage capacity seems to be less limited. Though he published a lot of books and papers in his career, he’s probably best known for his paper, “The Magical Number Seven, Plus or Minus Two,” published in The Psychological Review in 1956.

\n\n

$\"\"$ George Miller called the number “magical” because of its mysterious prevalence in so many things. For example:

\n\n

the seven wonders of the world
the seven seas
the seven deadly sins
the seven daughters of Atlas in the Pleiades
the seven ages of man
the seven levels of hell
the seven primary colors
the seven notes of the musical scale
the seven days of the week

\n\n

Perhaps, there is really nothing magical about the number at all, but rather, it simply represents a numerical sweet spot in human cognition. Though George was hesitant to assert it firmly, his research seems to have made the implication.

\n\n

Thus it is this cognitive numerical limit that gives us the rule of thumb for navigation breadth:

\n\n

Static navigation menus should not exceed 7 (plus or minus 2) items.

\n\n

'Static' navigation refers to the kind of anchored navigation, which does not change regularly – the navigation structures you hope your users will learn through frequent use. This is opposed to dynamic menus and lists of links like “Related Links”. One could logically argue that too many items, even in a dynamic list, will likely create a lot of visual noise and contribute to information overload. Long lists of links are rarely, but sometimes necessary; a paging “News Archive,” for example.

\n\n

Navigation Depth

\n\n

The depth of static navigation systems should not exceed 3 levels.

\n\n

At my company, Base22, we’ve found through our own experience and usability testing that a good limit for the depth of static navigation is no more than three levels. In fact, we’ve even hard-coded this limit into the widgets we use to render static navigation. If stakeholders feel the need to publish content at deeper levels, we believe the IA is flawed and needs to be revised or the business stakeholders need to come to a better understanding of the IA strategy.

\n\n

The concepts in a navigation structure are, after all, abstractions designed to collect and represent things that are related. Having a numerical limit to navigation depth forces us to complete the process of abstraction and classification to a certain standard. In this case, that standard is loosely based on factors pertaining to web usability (total number of clicks and what-not).

\n\n

Depth allows us to limit breadth and thus reduce the overall choices the user has to make at higher levels. But if concepts are too abstract, the navigation labels may not be discreet enough to support reliable decision making. So, depth provides progressive levels of detail below those higher level “chunks” that are more easily scanned and digested. This aids the foraging process through which users pick up and follow “information scent” – getting an increasing or decreasing sense of confirmation as they explore, and discovering new things along the way.

\n\n

But what about breadth versus depth? Which is better? Research tends to suggests that one should favor breadth over depth for web sites, but it’s always a balancing act. Information Architects have a lot to think about in this balancing act. What are the content and services that are currently available and how should they be classified and organized? What are the kinds of content and services that do not presently exist, but that are likely to come? Who are the users and how do they think? Do we want to influence their thinking and, if so, how?

\n\n

A basic 7/3 breadth/depth ratio provides a healthy set of parameters to work with. You won’t go to IA hell for stepping outside of those bounds, but you can at least be sure that it’s a good framework. It’s supported by scientific research and it has proven to work well in our experience. Using this as a general “rule of thumb” for navigation breadth and depth will give you a solid starting point so that you can focus on the fun stuff – classification and organization, abstraction and concretization, etc.

\n\n

Related Resources:

\n\n

The magical number 4 in short-term memory: a reconsideration of mental storage capacity

\n\n

<< Previous: Part 4

","modified":"2021-08-11T20:10:12.695Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","ogImage":"","subtitle":""},{"_id":"w3c-linked-data-platform-aims-to-reframe-the-web","title":"W3C Linked Data Platform Aims to Reframe the Web","description":"The World Wide Web Consortium works on a new specification for a Linked Data Platform.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2013-06-22T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

$\"\"\n\t\t\t\twidth=\"150\"$ Last week at the Center for Open Middleware in Madrid, Spain, history was\n\t\t\tmade. The World Wide Web Consortium’s Linked Data Platform working group concluded a third face-to-face\n\t\t\tmeeting in which the finer points of an emerging specification were vigorously debated. Being the dumbest\n\t\t\tguy in the room is not usually something to be proud of, but I’m lucky to have been there. What occurred\n\t\t\tlast week pertains to a paradigm shift in computing on a global scale and it will ultimately affect the\n\t\t\tfuture of the World Wide Web.

\n\n

$\"\"$ \n\t\t

\n\n\t\t

W3C’s Linked Data Platform working group, Madrid, Spain, June 2013

\n\n\t\t

From left to right: Cody Burleson (me), Henry Story, Nandana Mihindukulasooriya, Raúl García Castro, Arnaud\n\t\t\tLe Hors (top row), John Arwe (green shirt), Miel Vander Sande, Steve Speicher, Ashok Malhotra (grey beard),\n\t\t\tMiguel Esteban Gutiérrez, Kevin Page, and Roger Menday. Note that others attended our daily meetings by\n\t\t\tphone. Some of the other contributors include Ted Thibodeau, Bart van Leeuwen, Steve Battle, Sandro Hawke,\n\t\t\tDavid Wood, and Eric Prud’hommeaux. Numerous other contributors have also been playing an active role, and I\n\t\t\tbeg pardon for not including an exhaustive list.

\n\n\t\t

Reframing the Web

\n\n\t\t

Though I’ve been working with web technology for years, it still takes every ounce of concentration I’ve got\n\t\t\tto keep up with these guys. They argue and debate in a language that seems to know every little nuance of\n\t\t\tevery specification that defines the Web that runs our world. They cite RFC numbers and even specific\n\t\t\tpassages by memory while, pretending to take notes, I am Googling feverishly to keep up. At times, following\n\t\t\talong is a bit like reading RegEx, but I think I can boil it down to the salient points for you.

\n\n\t\t

What we’re working on is a new reframing of the Web – an essential new part of the emerging Semantic Web,\n\t\t\tcalled the Linked Data Platform. Years ago, we were compelled to put our documents on the Internet and\n\t\t\tthrough what was essentially a wildly successful grassroots movement, the World Wide Web was born. Now, we\n\t\t\tare compelled to put our data on the Web in a new movement that promises to transform the current Web of\n\t\t\tlinked documents into a Web of linked data. It’s sort of like turning the Web into a massive database, which\n\t\t\twill allow us to mix and mash, query, and process information like never before. It promises to unlock what\n\t\t\tis still incredibly huge potential – huge enough to change the world yet again.

\n\n\t\t

$\"\"\n\t\t\t\twidth=\"150\"$ So, what’s the big deal? What’s the big difference between linkeddocuments\n\t\t\tand linked data? Documents on the web are largely unstructured or just semi-structured. They are mainly\n\t\t\tdesigned for browsers to render and for humans to read. Data, on the other hand, is structured for\n\t\t\tprocessing. You can do a lot of magical things with it. Take statistics guru, Hans Rosling’s global trends\n\t\t\tin health and economics for example. In one of the most amazing TED presentations to date, he showed how\n\t\t\tvisualizing data could help us see new things – breaking down our preconceived notions and debunking common\n\t\t\tmyths about the so-called “developing world”. By putting a bunch of existing data together, he was able to\n\t\t\telicit much more from all the data than what was originally there. If Hans could do something so spectacular\n\t\t\twith what he was able to cobble together, just imagine the possibilities in a world where everybody is\n\t\t\tputting data on the Web.

\n\n\t\t

The technology for Linked Data is actually extremely simple:

\n\n\t\t

First, those HTTP URLs or URIs that you normally see in your web browser’s address bar are now being used to\n\t\t\tidentify, not just documents, but the things that they are about; concepts and real-world things (people,\n\t\t\tplaces, products, events, etc).

\n\n\t\t

Second, if we use those URI’s to fetch data using the HTTP protocol, we should get back data in standard and\n\t\t\twell-defined formats (using RDF and SPARQL, for example).

\n\n\t\t

Third, when we get that data back, it doesn’t just contain information about the entity we asked for, but\n\t\t\talso relationships and links to other things. These relationships are expressed with URIs and so, through\n\t\t\tthese linked URI’s and the standards for the data, we can slice, dice, and traverse the web as one big graph\n\t\t\tof information.

\n\n\t\t

Data comes in a lot of forms and formats. It is incredibly diverse. There is government data; tons of it.\n\t\t\tMedical data. Scholastic data. Genomics data. Social data. Geographic data. The list goes on and on.\n\t\t\tUnlocking and linking this data will represent a sea change of insight and discovery. The Linked Data\n\t\t\tPlatform (LDP) can help us in this plan by providing a standard set of principles and patterns for\n\t\t\tinteracting with Linked Data over HTTP (accessing, updating, creating and deleting resources from servers\n\t\t\tthat expose their resources as Linked Data). There’s a lot more to reframing the Web than just the LDP, but\n\t\t\twe believe the LDP is going to play an extremely important role.

\n\n\t\t

The working group hopes to have a recommendation published by Q1, 2014. In the mean-time, you can review some\n\t\t\tof our work-in-progress on the working group’s wiki. You can also follow my blog and I’ll keep you posted.\n\t\t

\n","modified":"2021-06-01T14:02:27.595Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"install-java-plugin-for-64bit-firefox-on-centos-6-4","title":"Install the Java Plugin for 64bit Firefox on CentOS 6.4","description":"How to install the Oracle (not OpenJDK) Java Plugin for 64bit Firefox on CentOS 6.4","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-centos.svg","created":"2013-05-03T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

$\"CentOS$

\n\n

Today, I had to install the Java plugin for 64bit Firefox on CentOS 6.4. The procedure wasn’t too bad, but it wasn’t exactly straight-forward either. So, I’m recording what worked for when I have to do it again. Hopefully, you might find it useful too. This is not a descriptive tutorial; it’s just quick notes, so you may have to do a little reading between the lines.

\n\n

Java must be installed on the system first. This procedure only works with the version you download from Oracle; it will not work with the OpenJDK version of Java you’ll have when using the ‘yum install java’ command.

\n\n

Download Linux x64 RPM from Oracle's Java Downloads for All Operating Systems page.

\n\n

Close Firefox.

\n\n

Change to root user and enter password.

\n\nsu\n\n

Change directory to /usr/java. If it isn’t created, create it.

\n\nmkdir /usr/java\ncd /usr/java\n\n

Execute rpm on the Java RPM you just downloaded…

\n\nrpm -ivh /home/basejump/Downloads/jre-7u21-linux-x64.rpm\n\n

Validate with:

\n\njava -version\n\n

Delete the original RPM; you don’t need that anymore.

\n\nrm -rf /home/basejump/Downloads/jre-7u21-linux-x64.rpm\n\n

From the /usr/java directory, Find the Firefox plugin (which gets installed with java):

\n\nfind . | grep libnpjp\n\n

For me, that returned:

\n\n/usr/java/jre1.7.0_21/lib/amd64/libnpjp2.so\n\n

Change to directory for Firefox plugins:

\n\ncd /usr/lib64/mozilla/plugins\n\n

Be careful. There is also a /usr/lib/mozilla/plugins directory. Be sure you’re in lib64!

\n\n

Create symbolic link to the plugin:

\n\nln -fs /usr/java/jre1.7.0_21/lib/amd64/libnpjp2.so libnpjp2.so\n\n

Exit the root user:

\n\nexit\n\n

Start Firefox and validate by going to Tools > Addons > Plugins. You should now see Java Plug-in 1.x.x enabled.

","modified":"2021-05-08T00:14:46.352Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"automatically-build-and-include-one-eclipse-project-into-another","title":"Automatically Build and Include One Eclipse Project Into Another","description":"In your Eclipse IDE, you can automatically build and consume one project into another as a Java jar file. Here's how.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-eclipse.svg","created":"2013-04-21T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-06-02T20:23:01.587Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

You can automatically build and consume one project into another as a Java jar file in your Eclipse or Rational IDE.

This will save you from having to right-click and export every time you change code in the project that’s consumed. Or it can save you from having to write a build script just for this purpose, which I am embarrassed to say I've done (more than once).

In your Eclipse or Rational IDE, right-click on the destination project and select Properties.
Select Java Build Path and then the Projects tab.
Click Add… to add the dependency project that you want to consume as a jar file.
Next, in the left-hand side of the Properties dialog, switch from the Java Build Path to the item that says Deployment Assembly.
Click Add… and select the project to be consumed as shown below

\n $\"\"$
Finally, click Apply and OK.

Now, when I build my web app project, my base22-commons library (a separate project) is now automatically built and included in WEB-INF/lib as base22-commons.jar.

","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"ia-files-004-taxonomies","title":"The IA Files 4 - Taxonomies","description":"An overview of taxonomies and their role in information architecture.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/webpage-icon.png","created":"2013-03-28T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

$\"\"$ In my previous post in the IA Files, we took a look at definitions – those things you typically find in dictionaries or, perhaps more commonly today, when you type ‘define <word>‘ in a Google search.

\n\n

A definition states the meaning of a concept and distinguishes it from all others, thus preserving the logical order of a concept’s hierarchical interdependence. [1]

\n\n

Such a hierarchy can be expressed in a model that Information Architects like to call a taxonomy. Taxonomies are quintessential to information architecture and very well worth a pause for deeper reflection. So, before we go flingin’ the term around like we know what we’re doing, let’s take that pause now…

\n\n

What is a taxonomy?

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Carl Linnaeus, the father of modern taxonomy.

\n\n

The term taxonomy is ancient Greek for “arrangement method“. In the strictest sense, taxonomy refers to the conception, naming, and classification of biological organisms. In this sense, the term is heavily associated with Carl Linnaeus, the father of modern taxonomy, and the dude who originally came up with the formal system of naming species using the two-part Latin word scheme known as binomial nomenclature (e.g. Psittacus alexandri, Turdus migratorius, Tradescantia virginiana). Information Architects tend to use the term in a more general sense to refer to just about any kind of hierarchical ordering of items into groups based on similarities and/or differences.

\n\n

Some IA’s use the term to describe the navigational structure of a website, although I prefer to call that site architecture. One case where I do often use the word taxonomy is when referring to a controlled vocabulary of terms used for describing content. In IBM’s Web Content Manager, for example, taxonomies are used to represent hierarchical collections of terms called categories. Content authors can apply these categories as a way to describe the subject and nature of their content. Menus and search components are then used to retrieve and display content based on the categories applied to the content items. This allows us to do cool things like render dynamic lists of hyperlinks that are relevant and related to the content item being viewed.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Taxonomy Categories in IBM Web Content Manager

\n\n

Formal versus informal taxonomies

\n\n

Understanding the difference between formal and informal taxonomies is essential. A formal taxonomy is one in which the associations between the taxons or categories are formally defined.

\n\n

A common formal classification scheme expresses the “is a (type of)” relationship. In such a scheme, the child concepts under a given parent are said to be a type of the parent. A simple test for following the rule is to use the concepts in a sentence where the child is the subject, “is a” or “is a type of” is used as the predicate, and the parent as the object.

\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Subject	Predicate	Object
DOG	IS A	MAMMAL
MOZARRELLA	IS A	CHEESE TOPPING

\n\n

Because these sentences logically evaluate to TRUE, we can rest assured that we have not broken the rule, which makes our taxonomy formal.

\n\n

This is important because a taxonomy that is intended to be formal should be formal throughout. Otherwise, it will not serve its purpose effectively. If most of the taxonomy adheres to the rule of formality, but some of it does not, then this can cause confusion amongst users.

\n\n

Best Practice

\n\n

The defined relationship between concepts in a formal taxonomy should be uniformly applied throughout the entire taxonomy.

\n\n

Now, I am not saying that all taxonomies must be formal. I am just saying that when they are intended to be formal, their rule of relation must be explicitly defined and adhered to. Otherwise, they are not formal or they are simply incorrect.

\n\n

Most navigation systems on websites and portals are informal. They typically always express increasing levels of specificity as one goes deeper into the structure, but specificity is not a rule of relationship between concepts. It is a general characteristic of all taxonomies. As we go down into the branches of a taxonomy tree, we find increasing levels of detail. As we move up towards the trunk, we’re moving through increasing levels of abstraction. That’s a fundamental principal of the function and purpose of taxonomy as a classification tool, but it is not itself the classification scheme.

\n\n

Which brings us to an interesting question…

\n\n

If there are no “rules” for an informal taxonomy such as a website navigation system, then how do we go about building one properly – one that we can say is good?

\n\n

Rest assured, there are best practices and “rules of thumb” for building effective website navigation systems and in the next installment of the IA Files, I’ll begin to share some things my colleagues and I have learned from our experiences, so please stay tuned.

\n\n\t\t\t\t\t\t\t

<< Previous: Part 3 Next: Part 5 >>

\n\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\n

Notes:

Rand, Ayn. Introduction to Objectivist Epistemology: Expanded Second Edition, ‘Definitions’, page 40.

","modified":"2021-05-07T17:43:02.294Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"define-a-servlet-using-java-annotations-instead-of-xml","title":"How to Define a Servlet Using Java Annotations Instead of XML","description":"With Servlet 3.0, it's now possible to define your servlet using Java annotations instead of using XML in the web.xml file. Here's how...","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-java.svg","created":"2013-03-23T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

$\"\"$ With Servlet 3.0, it’s now possible to define your servlet using annotations instead of XML in the web deployment descriptor (web.xml). This can simplify maintenance and deployments because it keeps the servlet definition inline with the servlet’s actual code – everything’s conveniently found and managed together in one file. For those of you ready to start evolving into Java EE 6, here’s the essential information you need to know.

\n\n

Use the @WebServlet annotation to define (declare) your servlet.

\n\n

@WebServlet(\n    description = "Main dispatcher for the application.",\n    urlPatterns = {\n        "/HelloServlet",\n        "/"\n    })\npublic class HelloServlet extends HttpServlet {\n \n    // servlet code...\n \n}

\n\n

Here's another example...

\n\n@WebServlet(value="/hello")\npublic class HelloServlet extends GenericServlet {\n \n // servlet code...\n \n}\n\n

Note that I’ve defined URL mappings using urlPatterns in one case and then using value in another. The JavaDoc for the @WebServlet annotation states they are the same. There are other optional elements that can be used with the annotation (e.g. initParams, loadOnStartup, etc.) and those can be found in the JavaDoc also.

\n","modified":"2021-05-08T00:26:14.981Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"ia-files-003-definitions-defined","title":"The IA Files 3 - Definitions, Defined","description":"Understanding the information architecture of word definitions.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/webpage-icon.png","created":"2013-02-22T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

$\"\"$

\n\n

In my previous post in the IA Files, I introduced the role of concepts in human cognition and language. I wrote about how concepts are formed in a process that involves both differentiation and integration. Being conscious of that process can help you become a better Information Architect (IA).

\n\n

Today we continue building on this foundation with a look at definitions. A definition states the meaning of a concept and distinguishes it from all others. It preserves the logical order of a concept’s hierarchical interdependence in the great big tree of knowledge.

\n\n

As an IA, you can use definitions as an important tool in your craft. So, you should understand very precisely what a definition is, the purpose it serves, and the rules of a correct definition. And then, of course, you have to know how to put this knowledge into practice, which we’re leading up to, but… first things first…

\n\n

What is a definition?

\n\n

At the time of this writing, Wikipedia describes a definition as “a statement that explains the meaning of a term (a word, phrase, or other set of symbols)”. Other trustworthy sources pretty much agree that it is:

\n\n

A statement of the exact meaning of a word, especially in a dictionary.

\n\n

This statement of meaning should identify the nature of the units subsumed under the concept as concisely as possibly – describing only what is essential. So, how do we arrive upon the nature of the concept and identify what is essential? We use a process that includes both differentiation and integration.

\n\n

Differentiation and integration – the rules of a correct definition

\n\n

Remember the picture of the camel caravan in the previous post from the The IA Files? We identified various units in the picture by differentiating them based on their distinguishing characteristics. We then used a process of integration by blending the similar units into a single new mental entity – a concept, a classification, or in Java-speak, a class. The rules of a correct definition are derived from this same general process of forming concepts, so a good definition:

\n\n

Specifies the distinguishing characteristic(s) of the units. (differentia)
Indicates the category of existents from which they were differentiated (genus)

\n\n

The differentia isolates the units of a concept from all others and the genus indicates its connection to a wider group.

\n\n

Why are definitions important to information architecture?

\n\n

As an IA, you will use definitions as a tool to aid in the proper classification and organization of information. You won’t really be using written definitions, although you can when that is helpful for your own clarification. What I am trying to point out is what’s behind a definition so you can understand how to properly define a concept in your own mind or properly hold the definition in your mind. Knowing what’s behind a definition helps you think about concepts in a simple way. As you do the work of classification and organization, for example, you can ask questions that relate to the two rules, such as:

\n\n

What makes this unit different than the others? Anything significant?
Are there units with differences significant enough to set them apart? And do we have enough of them to justify a new category?
Is the term we’re using to describe this set of units the best term? Is it too narrow? Too broad?
Forgetting any formal definition, how does this user community actually think of this concept in this context and in this particular culture?

\n\n

Putting it to practice

\n\n

We now have a framework for answering the kinds of questions that are useful to classification and organization.

\n\n

In short, we can use the rules of a correct definition, differentia and genus.

\n\n

Of course, we might also leverage this knowledge in order to break the rules effectively. I know you, don’t I? You rebel, you.

\n\n

<< Previous: Part 2 Next: Part 4 >>

","modified":"2021-08-05T17:13:06.442Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"Default","ogImage":"","subtitle":""},{"_id":"create-custom-properties-for-a-resource-environment-provider-using-wasadmin-scripting","title":"How to Create Custom Properties for a Resource Environment Provider Using wasadmin Scripting","description":"An example wasadmin script (in Jython) that demonstrates how to create and/or update custom properties for resource environment providers.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2013-02-17T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Here’s an example wasadmin script (in Jython) that demonstrates how to create and/or update custom properties for resource environment providers. This one, in particular, is a good template for scripting the creation and/or updating of dynamic content spot mappings for a WebSphere Portal theme.

\n\n

First, I want to give a shout out to Gabriel Aberasturi, System Analist at Grupo Versia who helped me find this long desired script by answering my question in LinkedIn; he pointed me to IBM documentation for this that none of my searches had returned. Also, after posting the original article, my friend Jared Piper, who works at the Neiman Marcus Group, provided a much improved script, which has now replaced my old example in this article. I could never be any good if it wasn’t for a strong community of people like Gabriel and Jared who take the time to help. That’s exactly why I blog what I learn – to give back. Where would any of us be without the virtual community that makes us stronger? I know I speak for everyone in ours when I say to Gabriel and those who take the time to share that we salute you.

\n\n

Anyway, here’s the script…

\n\n

Jython: Create dynamic content spot mappings

\n\n

\n# To execute, navigate to wp_profile/bin and use:\n# wsadmin -lang jython -user wpsadmin -password wpsadmin -conntype SOAP -host mojo.base22.com -port 10025 -f C:/workspace/themeScripts/updated_example.py\n \n# Identify the parent ID and assign it to the newrep variable.\nnewrep = AdminConfig.getid('/ResourceEnvironmentProvider:WP DynamicContentSpotMappings/')\nprint newrep\n \n# Identify the required attributes\n#print AdminConfig.required('J2EEResourceProperty')\n \n# Identify all possible attributes\n#print AdminConfig.attributes('J2EEResourceProperty')\n \n# Set up a list of dictionaries for the properties. Each Dictionary should have "name" and "value" at a minimum. Look at line 10 for possible attributes\nthemePropertyList = [\n    {"name": "MyTheme_toolbar", "value": "res:/wps/themeModules/modules/pagebuilder/jsp/toolbar.jsp,wp_toolbar"},\n    {"name": "MyTheme_status", "value": "res:/MyTheme/themes/html/dynamicSpots/status.jsp,wp_status_bar"},\n    {"name": "MyTheme_sideNav", "value": "res:/MyTheme/themes/html/dynamicSpots/sideNavigation.jsp?startLevel=2"},\n    {"name": "MyTheme_projectMenu", "value": "res:/wps/themeModules/modules/pagebuilder/jsp/projectMenu.jsp,wp_project_menu"},\n    {"name": "MyTheme_preview", "value": "res:/wps/themeModules/modules/pagebuilder/jsp/preview.jsp,wp_preview"},\n    {"name": "MyTheme_asaPortlet", "value": "res:/wps/themeModules/modules/asa/jsp/asaPortlet.jsp, wp_analytics"},\n    {"name": "MyTheme_asaHead", "value": "res:/wps/themeModules/modules/asa/jsp/head.jsp, wp_analytics"},\n    {"name": "MyTheme_topNav", "value": "res:/MyTheme/themes/html/dynamicSpots/navigation.jsp?rootClass=wpthemeHeaderNav&amp;amp;startLevel=0&amp;amp;primeRoot=true"},\n    {"name": "MyTheme_pageModeToggle", "value": "res:/MyTheme/themes/html/dynamicSpots/pageModeToggle.jsp, wp_toolbar"},\n    {"name": "MyTheme_primaryNav", "value": "res:/MyTheme/themes/html/dynamicSpots/navigation.jsp?rootClass=wpthemePrimaryNav%20wpthemeLeft&amp;amp;startLevel=1"},\n    {"name": "MyTheme_secondaryNav", "value": "res:/MyTheme/themes/html/dynamicSpots/navigation.jsp?rootClass=wpthemeSecondaryNav&amp;amp;startLevel=2&amp;amp;levelsDisplayed=2"},\n    {"name": "MyTheme_crumbTrail", "value": "res:/MyTheme/themes/html/dynamicSpots/crumbTrail.jsp?rootClass=wpthemeCrumbTrail&amp;amp;startLevel=2"},\n    {"name": "MyTheme_layout", "value": "lm:template"},\n    {"name": "MyTheme_asa", "value": "res:/wps/themeModules/modules/asa/jsp/asa.jsp,wp_analytics"},\n    {"name": "MyTheme_search", "value": "res:/MyTheme/themes/html/dynamicSpots/modules/search/coveo-search.jsp"}\n]\n \n# Get the J2EE resource property set:\npropSet = AdminConfig.showAttribute(newrep, 'propertySet')\nresourceProperties = AdminConfig.list("J2EEResourceProperty", propSet).splitlines()\n \n# Loop through properties we are adding\nfor property in themePropertyList:\n    found = 0\n    for resourceProperty in resourceProperties:\n        if (AdminConfig.showAttribute(resourceProperty, "name") == property["name"]):\n            # Modify if values are different\n            if (AdminConfig.showAttribute(resourceProperty, "value") != property["value"]):\n                print("Found and modified: ", property["name"])\n                print AdminConfig.modify(resourceProperty, [['value', property["value"]]])\n            else:\n                print("Found but did not modify: ", property["name"])\n            found = 1\n            break\n    if found == 0:\n        # Add to the property set\n        print("Creating new property: ", property["name"], " ", property["value"])\n        print AdminConfig.create('J2EEResourceProperty', propSet, [["name", property["name"]], ["value", property["value"]]])\n \n# Save the configuration changes:\nAdminConfig.save()\n \n# Display finished message\nprint "Config Saved."\n

","modified":"2021-06-15T13:16:22.113Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","ogImage":"","subtitle":""},{"_id":"check-user-access-role-in-hcl-portal-theme","title":"How to Check User Access Role in an HCL Portal theme","description":"How to use the AccessControlRuntimeModelBean to get the current access control permissions on a resource.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2013-02-14T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-08T00:27:35.018Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

$\"WebSphere$ Since the release of Portal 7, there have been a\n number of Portal EL beans exposed for access in your theme. EL beans are Java objects that can be used with\n the JSTL Expression Language. One of these objects, the AccessControlRuntimeModelBean, provides convenient\n access to the current access control permissions on a resource.

\n\n

In the default Portal 8.0 theme, for example, you can find the following code stanza, which is used to\n determine whether or not a Help link should be shown in the UI. The snippet is in\n /themes/html/dynamicSpots/commonActions.jsp and it looks like this:

\n\n

<%-- Help icon - only displayed for users with admin or editor role --%>\n<portal-logic:if loggedIn="yes" line="1">\n    <c:set var="admin" value="<%=com.ibm.portal.ac.data.RoleType.ADMIN%>"/>\n    <c:if test="${wp.ac[wp.selectionModel.selected].hasPermission[admin]}">\n        <a class="wpthemeHelp" href="javascript:void(0);" onclick="javascript:window.open('/wps/iehs/topic/com.ibm.wp.admin.help/admin/h_wp_admin_welcome.html','wpthemeHelp','width=800,height=600')" aria-label="<portal-fmt:text key="help.title" bundle="nls.commonUI"/>" aria-haspopup="true" role="button">\n            <img src="${themeConfig['resources.modules.ibm.contextRoot']}/themes/html/dynamicSpots/icons/blank.gif" alt="">\n            <span class="wpthemeAltText"><portal-fmt:text key="help.title" bundle="nls.commonUI"/></span>\n        </a>\n    </li>\n    </c:if>\n</portal-logic:if>

\n\n

First, a JSTL variable, admin, is being set with the value of a RoleType constant representing the\n Administrator role. The AccessControlRuntimeModelBean is exposed as an EL bean called wp.ac, which has a\n hasPermission method that takes the RoleType as parameter. That’s the part, written in expression language,\n that looks like this:

\n\n

${wp.ac[wp.selectionModel.selected].hasPermission[admin]}

\n\n

So, you can use the same general stanza to check whether or not the current user is in a given role on a\n given resource.

\n\n

Your Copy/Paste Template…

\n\n

Here’s a general template you can use to copy/paste from.

\n\n

<portal-logic:if loggedIn="yes">\n    <c:if test="${wp.ac[wp.selectionModel.selected].hasPermission[<role_type_var>]}">\n        ... render something ...\n    </li>\n</portal-logic:if>

\n\n

And here’s a useful variation, which checks against a named portal page, rather than the currently selected\n page.

\n\n

<portal-logic:if loggedIn="yes">\n    <c:if test="${wp.ac[wp.navigationModel['uniquename']].hasPermission[<role_type_var>]}">\n        ... render something ...\n    </li>\n</portal-logic:if>

\n\n

Role Types:

\n\n

The com.ibm.portal.ac.data.RoleType object shown above exposes the following RoleType constants:\n

ADMIN
SECURITY_ADMIN
DELEGATOR
CAN_RUN_AS_USER
MANAGER
EDITOR
MARKUP_EDITOR
CONTRIBUTOR
PRIVILEGED_USER
USER

\n\n

Related Content

\n\n

You may also be interested in another useful Portal EL Bean, which I describe in my post, How to Display User\n Attributes in an HCL Portal Theme.

\n\n

For a list of more EL beans that can be used in theme development, see: Expression language beans for accessing programming models | HCL Digital Experience

\n\n

Acknowledgements

\n\n

Special thanks goes to Georgy Gobozov who provided information that improved the quality of this post. Georgy\n blogs about Android and WebSphere Portal development, among other things (in both Russian and English) on\n his weblog, Блоггг.

","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"xmlaccess-samples","title":"XMLAccess Samples","description":"A list of all the XMLAccess sample files available with the HCL Digital Experience platform.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2013-01-24T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2022-04-01T00:22:42.204Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

$\"WebSphere$ XMLAccess is a command-line utility for exporting and\nimporting various portal configuration settings in an XML format. The utility takes an XML file as input and\nproduces an XML file, which is the results of the input. It’s a very common way of moving configuration\nsettings from one environment to another. On the portal file system, there are number of useful samples,\nwhich can be used as-is or a basis for creating your own scripts. Following is a list of the available\nXMLAccess samples. I wanted to list these on my blog because it’s often more convenient to check them here\nthan on the actual server file system.

\n\n

XMLAccess samples

\n\n

Found in <PortalServer-root>/doc/xml-samples.

In the HCL Docker/Kubernetes image from HCL, for example, they can be found at the following path:
/opt/HCL/PortalServer/doc/xml-samples

List last updated from files in HCL Portal version 9.5 (CF200)

\n\n

\n ActivatePortlet.xml
\nCleanSystemSlots.xml
\nCleanupUsers.xml
\nClonePortlet.xml
\nCopyPage.xml
\nCreateAnalyticsTags.xml
\nCreateApplicationCategoryByLabel.xml
\nCreateApplicationCategoryByURL.xml
\nCreateCsaPage.xml
\nCreateFilter.xml
\nCreateLanguage.xml
\nCreateLegacyPage.xml
\nCreatePageFromTemplate.xml
\nCreatePageFromZip.xml
\nCreatePage.xml
\nCreateTagsAndRatings.xml
\nCreateUrl.xml
\nCreateUser.xml
\nCreateUXFMDialogDefinition.xml
\nCreateWSRPProducer.xml
\nDeleteAnalyticsTags.xml
\nDeleteApplicationCategory.xml
\nDeleteFilter.xml
\nDeletePage.xml
\nDeletePortlet.xml
\nDeleteTagsAndRatings.xml
\nDeleteUser.xml
\nDeleteUXFMDialogDefinition.xml
\nDeployPortlet.xml
\nDeployThemeFromWebModule.xml
\nDeployTheme.xml
\nExportAllDAMCollections.xml
\nExportAllPolicyNodes.xml
\nExportAllPortlets.xml
\nExportAllUsers.xml
\nExportAnalyticsTags.xml
\nExportIncludingOrphanedData.xml
\nExportManagedPagesRelease.xml
\nExportPageResult.xml
\nExportPage.xml
\nExportPortletAndPage.xml
\nExportPortletAndStaticPage.xml
\nExportRelease.xml
\nExportStaticPage.xml
\nExportSubTree.xml
\nExportTagsAndRatings.xml
\nExportTasks.xml
\nExportThemesAndSkins.xml
\nExportUniqueRelease.xml
\nExportUserResource.xml\n

\n\n

\n ExportUXFMDialogDefinition.xml
\nExportWSRPCustomizedPortletInstances.xml
\nExportWSRPProducersAndPortlets.xml
\nExportWSRPProducer.xml
\nExport.xml
\nFederationDeletion.xml
\nFederationImport.xml
\nindex1.zip
\nIntegrateRemotePortlet.xml
\nModifyPortlet.xml
\nMovePage.xml
\npagetitles_ar.properties
\npagetitles_ca.properties
\npagetitles_cs.properties
\npagetitles_da.properties
\npagetitles_de.properties
\npagetitles_el.properties
\npagetitles_en.properties
\npagetitles_es.properties
\npagetitles_fi.properties
\npagetitles_fr.properties
\npagetitles_hr.properties
\npagetitles_hu.properties
\npagetitles_it.properties
\npagetitles_iw.properties
\npagetitles_ja.properties
\npagetitles_kk.properties
\npagetitles_ko.properties
\npagetitles_nl.properties
\npagetitles_no.properties
\npagetitles_pl.properties
\npagetitles_pt_BR.properties
\npagetitles_pt.properties
\npagetitles_ro.properties
\npagetitles_ru.properties
\npagetitles_sk.properties
\npagetitles_sl.properties
\npagetitles_sv.properties
\npagetitles_th.properties
\npagetitles_tr.properties
\npagetitles_uk.properties
\npagetitles_zh.properties
\npagetitles_zh_TW.properties
\nRegisterPreDeployedEAR.xml
\nTask.xml
\nTransaction.xml
\nUpdateAccesscontrol.xml
\nUpdateFilter.xml
\nUpdatePortlet.xml\n

\n\n

Example: export all themes and skins

\n\n

Following is an example of how one of these scripts might be executed on a UNIX system:

\n\n/opt/HCL/PortalServer/bin/xmlaccess.sh -user wpsadmin -password <password> -url http://<host>:<port>/wps/config -in /opt/HCL/PortalServer/doc/xml-samples/ExportThemesAndSkins.xml -out /opt/HCL/wp_profile/ExportThemesAndSkins_result.xml\n\n\n

In the command above, you should modify the paths if they differ on your server and you must also replace\n <password>, <host>, and <port> with values appropriate to your own environment.

","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","ogImage":"","subtitle":""},{"_id":"base22-consultants-creed","title":"The Base22 Consultant's Creed","description":"A 'just for fun' pep talk I wrote for new recruits at Base22.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/2018/07/Base22CreedFlag-thumbnail.png","created":"2013-01-23T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

At Base22, we have a channel on Skype that we use to exchange key information such as when we’re bouncing a\n\t\t\tserver or when we’re polling the staff for ideas to resolve some issue. Of course, there’s also a bit of\n\t\t\tlighthearted play that goes on. For example, here’s some content from today’s Skype chatter that I thought\n\t\t\twas amusing. Team pride – HOOYA!

\n\n\t\t

The Pep Talk for New Recruits

\n\n\t\t

Today, you people are no longer maggots. Today, you are Base22 consultants. You’re part of a brotherhood.\n\t\t\tFrom now on until the day you die, wherever you are, every Base22 consultant is your brother. Most of you\n\t\t\twill go to client sites. Some of you will not come back. But always remember this: Base22 consultants die\n\t\t\tfor our clients. That’s what we’re here for. But Base22 lives forever. And that means YOU live forever.

\n\n\t\t

$\"\"$ \n\t\t

\n\n\t\t

The Creed

\n\n\t\t

This is my laptop. There are many others like it, but this one is mine. My laptop is my best friend. It is my\n\t\t\tlife. I must master it as I must master my life. Without me, my laptop is useless. Without my laptop, I am\n\t\t\tuseless. I must evolve the enterprise. I must evolve the Web. I must design better than my competition, who\n\t\t\tis trying to beat me. I must out-code him before he out-codes me. I will. Before God I swear this creed: my\n\t\t\tlaptop and myself are defenders of my company, we are the masters of our platform, we are the saviors of my\n\t\t\tlife. So be it, until there are no defects, but peace and delight amongst all end-users. Amen.

\n","modified":"2021-05-08T00:30:01.269Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"display-user-attributes-in-hcl-portal-theme","title":"How to Display User Attributes in an HCL Portal Theme","description":"Here's how to use the UserBean, (a Portal EL bean available since version 7) for convenient access to the attributes of the authenticated user.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2013-01-22T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-06-01T04:38:34.753Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

$\"WebSphere$ Since the release of Portal 7, there have been a number of Portal EL beans exposed for access in your theme. EL beans are Java objects that can be used with the JSTL Expression Language. One of these objects, the UserBean, provides convenient access to the defined user attributes of the authenticated user.

\n\n

In the default Portal 8.0 and CTC 3.1 theme, for example, you can find the following JSTL statement, which is used to print the authenticated user’s name in the theme header. The snippet is in /themes/html/dynamicSpots/commonActions.jsp and it looks like this:

\n\n<c:out value="${wp.user[themeConfig['user.displaynameattribute']]}" />\n\n

The JSTL c:out tag in the line above is actually using two EL beans together. The ThemeConfigBean is providing access to theme metadata, the value of which is being passed as a parmeter to the UserBean. To clarify, we could simplify that line to go after the user’s surname, which is defined by LDAP convention as 'sn'...

\n\n<c:out value="{wp.user['sn']}" />\n\n

You have to be careful though; I learned that you cannot expect a String to be returned in all cases. Take this for example:

\n\n<c:out value="{wp.user['givenName']}" />\n\n

That prints the username with square brackets surrounding it (e.g. [Cody]) and it took me a bit to understand why. As it turns out, givenName was a multi-valued attribute, so what was actually being returned was an ArrayList. Once I knew that, it was easy enough to solve the problem with the following stanza:

\n\n

<%-- givenName is an ArrayList --%>\n<c:set var="gName" value="${wp.user['givenName']}"/>\n<c:if test="${gName ne null}">\n    <c:set var="givenName" value="${gName[0]}"/>\n</c:if>\n<c:choose>\n    <c:when test="${givenName eq null || givenName eq ''}">\n        <a href="<%wpsURL.write(escapeXmlWriter);%>"><c:out value="${wp.user[themeConfig['user.displaynameattribute']]}" /></a>\n    </c:when>\n    <c:otherwise>\n        <a href="<%wpsURL.write(escapeXmlWriter);>"><c:out value="${givenName}" /> <c:out value="${wp.user['sn']}" /></a>\n    </c:otherwise>\n</c:choose>

\n\n

In the code above, I’m checking to see if the user has a givenName defined and if so, I’m printing it by accessing the first String in the ArrayList ( i.e. ${gName[0]} ). I put the result of that expression into a variable called givenName and then use it later as ${givenName} in a c:out tag.

\n\n

Now, you may be familiar with printing defined user attribute values in your theme using the portal-fmt tag like this:

\n\n<portal-fmt:user attribute="givenName"/>\n\n

I don’t have any reason to believe that one approach is better than the other, but it’s an alternative that you might find useful in some scenarios. Also, just being aware of these EL beans that are accessible from theme code is good. Perhaps the next time you see one, it will be a little more familiar to you now.

\n","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"ia-files-002-concepts-crows-camels-and-the-cognitive-divide","title":"The IA Files 2 - Concepts, Crows, Camels, and the Cognitive Divide","description":"What crows and camels can teach us about information architecture.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/webpage-icon.png","created":"2013-01-19T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

$\"\"$ We are\nall information architects. It’s just what we do. It’s what makes us human.

\n\n

Our ability to organize and classify information, to conceptualize and abstract – they’re what differentiate\nus from all other animals on the planet. It’s no wonder that information architecture is so fascinating; it\ngoes to the very heart of our humanity. It’s not only interesting to think about – it is itself what makes\nthinking possible!

\n\n

And since one of the chief aims of a professional IA is to communicate and to influence behavior, it’s\nsurprisingly useful for one to consider the very foundation of that: concepts – what they are, how\nwe form them, name them, classify and organize them, and ultimately how we use them in language, thought,\nweb campaigns, as content categories, and in site architecture and navigation.

\n\n

Crow Epistemology and the Cognitive Divide

\n\n

$\"\"\n$

\n\n

Our story begins at a clearing in the woods where a flock of hungry crows had gathered to forage for food.\nThe crows were unaware of the human observer who watched quietly from aside. The observer had prepared an\nexperiment that he could not have known at the time would make a lasting mark on cognitive science – an\nexperiment designed to explore the ability of birds to deal with numbers. Here’s how it went…

\n\n

The ‘Counting Crows’ Experiment

\n\n

A man walked through the clearing and into the forest. The startled crows fled into the tree tops where they\nwaited in hiding until the man returned and left the way he came. Then three men walked across the clearing\nand on into the woods. Again, the crows scattered up into the tree tops. This time, however, only two of the\nmen returned from the forest to leave the way they came.

\n\n

See, crows are actually pretty smart. They knew that whenever people entered those woods they always came\nout. So, the crows waited for that third dude and when he finally showed up and left the way he came, the\ncrows knew the coast was clear. They came out of the trees and back down to the clearing.

\n\n

But here’s the kicker. When five guys went in and only four returned, the crows came out of hiding.\nEvidently, they couldn’t discriminate beyond the level of three units and their perceptual-mathematical\nability consisted of a sequence such as one-two-three-many. [1]

\n\n

Whether this particular experiment is accurate or not is beside the point. What’s relevant is the principle\nit illustrates, which is that an animal’s ability to discriminate by purely perceptual means is very\nlimited. By ‘purely perceptual’, I mean through sight or sound and without using numbers to count. Now, you\nmight think that a man’s perceptual ability is greater than that of a crow, but as it turns out, it’s not by\nmuch: we may hold five or six units at most.

This fact demonstrates the role that concepts play in our cognitive abilities. I hope to impress upon you\nthat this principle, when well understood, is one of the most profitable instruments an Information\nArchitect can have in her repertoire. But, let’s not get ahead of ourselves (God is in the\n details); We need to have a shared understanding of what I mean when I use the term.

\n\n

What is a Concept?

\n\n

Starting simply, we could say that a concept is just a word – a label. Those taxonomy categories you use to\ntag content in your CMS are concepts. Your website navigation labels represent concepts. The headers of the\nwidgets on your web page are concepts. Concepts are very often just the best words that happen to come to\nmind when we need to classify and organize a set of things. Most all words, in fact, represent concepts.

\n\n

Words are, in other words, the things that transform concepts into mental entities. And even though most\nwords are abstractions, they ultimately represent concretes in reality – the things we perceive directly\nwith our senses: percepts. It can thus be argued that our ability to use a single word (or concept)\nto represent more things than we’re able to hold in our perception at any given moment is the key to that\ngreat cognitive divide that separates man from all other species.

\n\n

I’ve found that the most useful definition of the word ‘concept’, in the context of information architecture,\nis that which was written by Ayn Rand in her work on Objectivist Epistemology. She wrote:

\n\n

\n
A concept is a mental integration of two or more units possessing the same distinguishing\n characteristic(s), with their particular measurements omitted.
\n

\n\n

The units that she refers to may be any aspect of reality, whether they be perceptual concretes or\nother earlier-formed concepts. The units are isolated in a process of selective mental focus that separates\na particular attribute from all others. Or in other words, a differentiation is made, which\nseparates the units from all others in a given context. Take a view of a camel caravan in the Sahara desert,\nfor example.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Conceptualizing this view begins with differentiating one thing from another.The sky is obviously different\nthan the ground. There are tufts of grass on the ground and they are different than the backdrop of sand\nupon which we see them. The camels are clearly different than both the sky and the ground. And then there\nare two men who are different than the camels. These are the units, which are such because they can be\ndifferentiated from other aspects of the scene. The rocks and even the shadows on the sand are also units.\n

\n\n

The next step of the process involves integration, wherein we blend similar units into a single new\nmental entity based on something or several things similar about them. Those camels for example. Even though\ntheir different from a lot of things in the scene, they are very much like one another. So, even though\nthere are several of them, we can now use them as a single unit of thought. And it doesn’t matter that one\nmay be larger than another or a different shade of color; it still doesn’t make it something other than a\ncamel. The measurements of the particular attributes that make them camels can be omitted. The size of a\ncamel doesn’t take the camelness out of the camel.

\n\n

And then there is the fact that we’ve seen these creatures before. We’ve heard about them in stories. We know\nthey’ve been around for a long time and will likely be around for decades more. There has been, there are\nnow, and there will be numerous camels. The differentiations and the integrations that we’ve made in this\nscene extend far beyond it in all directions of our mind. How do we hold all of that in our mind, given that\nour perceptual-mathematical ability is not much greater than that of a crow? That’s the magic of\nthe concept (and quite possibly of the cognitive divide).

\n\n

The Function of Language

\n\n

Finally, we replace the concept with a single, specific, perceptual concrete – a placeholder that\ndifferentiates it from all other concretes and all other concepts: a word. This is the function of language.\n

\n\n

\n
Language is a code of visual-auditory symbols that serves the psycho-epistemological function of\n converting concepts into the mental equivalent of concretes. Language is the exclusive domain of\n concepts. Every word we use (with the exception of proper names) is a symbol that denotes a concept,\n i.e., that stands for an unlimited number of concretes of a certain kind. (Rand, ITOE, Ch.2)
\n

\n\n

This is the perfect place for me to conclude today’s file with a tie-back to IA and a hint at where we’re\ngoing. Wikipedia says that “information, in its most restricted technical sense, is a\nsequence of symbols that can be interpreted as a message.” The characters of the text you’re reading now\nform the words – the message. The words represent concepts – the meaning. And now that we\nhave a shared understanding of what I mean when I use the word concept, we can begin to explore how\nthey might be architected. That is to say, how they might be formally classified and\norganized, because of their meaning, or informally, to create new meaning or to influence\ninterpretation (e.g. to influence employee culture and behavior through a strategic arrangement and use of\nthem).

\n\n\n\n

<< Previous:\n Part 1 Next:\n Part 3 >>

\n\n

Notes:

Rand, Ayn. Introduction to Objectivist Epistemology: Expanded Second Edition,\n Chapter 7 – The story of the crows was said by Ayn Rand to have been originally told by a university\n classroom professor of psychology.

","modified":"2021-06-11T20:37:36.323Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"Default","subtitle":""},{"_id":"ia-files-001-into-the-fire","title":"The IA Files","description":"On Information Architecture - Concepts, Definitions, Taxonomies, and Navigation Breadth and Depth.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/webpage-icon.png","created":"2013-01-17T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

$\"\"$ Those who practice user-centered design\n might say that Information Architecture (IA) is all about organizing information in a way that\n is most useful and meaningful to end-users. Indeed that’s a big part of it, but certainly\n not all. If that were really all there was to it, we could just call it\n Information Organization.

\n\n

But Architecture implies more; it implies both art and science, both\n process and product. It implies planning, design, and construction. It implies a\n number of different components and systems integrated to create one cohesive whole. It’s a\n multi-faceted thing wherein we find multiple forces pushing and pulling on one another. What’s\n needed by the business and what’s viable? What’s wanted by the users? What are the capabilities\n and constraints of the technology platform? Of the organization? Its teams and individuals? A\n great IA must consider and balance all of these forces.

\n\n

I did my first job as an IA on a project to build a new employee portal for a package\n distribution company. The Project Manager at IBM said I’d be filling a role called “Information\n Architect”. Now, this was a very large and complex project with multiple C-level stakeholders\n and very ambitious goals. And it was a very big company – a global company. 400,000 souls –\n 90,000 of which would certainly be registered just after go-live.

\n\n

I remember thinking, Geeze, how many people is that, really? If you stacked 90,000\n employees feet on shoulders, they’d extend at least 85 miles or more. That’s Mount Everest… 15\n times. And then I thought about the lifetime of the portal and how many more people might\n interact with it over the years to come. I thought to myself, “Self, where do you even start\n with something like this?” And then it occurred to me to start by seeking an answer to the\n secret question that was weighing heavy on my mind…

What the hell is an Information Architect, anyway?

Nine years, several projects, countless sleepless nights, a few death marches, and at least ten\n thousand Google searches later, I’m still chewing on that question. My quest has taken me\n through library and information science, business strategy, governance, creative design,\n usability, graph and network theory, brain science, game theory, software engineering,\n philosophy, and even down into the nucleus of a cell where all those little A’s, G’s, C’s and\n T’s form the source code for life itself.

What is an Information Architect? What is Information Architecture? What is Information?\n

\n\n

It’s like a Zen Kōan. The more I grasp for the answer, the more it seems to squeeze through my\n fingers like water. The more questions I answer, the more questions arise. It’s mind bending,\n but maybe it’s not supposed to be. Maybe it’s just supposed to be a title on a business card\n for a guy that can help you build a website. And sure – it has been that for me, but it’s been\n much more. And sure, it’s been a long while since I was thrown into the fire of my first portal\n project and branded an IA. Yet every day still brings a new lesson. Every day – a new question.\n

\n\n

What is an Information Architect?

\n\n

I’m not sure I have a good answer yet, but I have some interesting stories to tell and I figure I\n bess get to tellin’ because maybe… just maybe… there’s someone out there who just got thrown\n into the fire and is typing the same question into Google now.

\n\n

Howdy friend. These are the IA Files.

\n\n

\n Next: Part 2 >>\n

","modified":"2021-05-08T00:31:09.311Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"resolving-404-errors-accessing-wcm-content-through-poc-servlet","title":"Resolving 404 Errors Accessing WCM Content Through POC Servlet","description":"A fix for 404 errors related to the URI resolution framework, which resolves a WCM resource (that is, a Piece Of Content or POC) to a portal view.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2013-01-12T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

The other day, I got a tweet from my buddy, Dave Hay, who blogs on A Portal to a Portal. He was looking for a\n post I had in my former blog before a lot of that content was lost. I looked on the Internet Archive Wayback Machine, which allows\n you to look at the Web as it was in the past and I found the content so I’m reposting it. Dave has since\n added more information to this subject, so be sure to check out his post also: "More on 404\n errors accessing WCM content through the POC Servlet (/wps/mypoc/…)"

Here’s the original post from December, 2011:

Recently, we had a problem where WCM URLs in OmniFind search results (generated by the Portal seedlist\n mechanism) were giving 404 errors when clicked. These are URLs that contain /wps/mypoc in the URL. This page\n documents a solution that worked for us.

/poc and /mypoc are mapped to the POC Servlet which is part of the URI resolution framework. The purpose of\n the URI resolution framework is to resolve a WCM resource (that is, a piece of content or POC) to a\n portal view.

But let me get to the point quickly. As you may know, you can create a portal page with the WCM Web Content\n Viewer (JSR286) on it and map the portal page to a site or web content folder in WCM. After creating and\n saving a portal page, you can find this mapping control in the advanced section when you edit the page\n properties. After mapping the portal page to a web content folder in WCM, any piece of content within that\n area should then get resolved to the mapped portal page and consequently render in the JSR286 viewer that is\n on it.

But recently, we had an issue where that wasn’t going too well for us; the default URL generated by the\n seedlist mechanism just wasn’t working – we got 404 response. We could not get the POC Servlet to resolve\n properly to a portal page. We were able to resolve the issue by rewriting the URL using a RegEx filter\n mechanism available to OmniFind. We found that links would always resolve properly as long as the base URL\n was as follows (with the content identifier appended):

https://www.ourportal.com/wps/mypoc/?urile=wcm%3apath%3a%2f

That is just an encoded form of the following:

https://www.ourportal.com/wps/mypoc/?urile=wcm:path:/

Append the content identifier to the end of that (typically the wcm library, site area path, and content ID).\n For example:

Content%2fSiteArea1%2fSiteArea1-1%2f7cdad580493e87dd89e7891b4dda79ec

Together, the resolvable URL should looks something like this:

https://www.ourportal.com/wps/mypoc/?urile=wcm%3apath%3a%2fContent%2fSiteArea1%2fSiteArea1-1%2f7cdad580493e87dd89e7891b4dda79ec\n

And that worked for us. It resolved to a portal view. You could tell because the URL in the browser then\n switched to one of those crazy portal URLs with all the state information encoded in it… and the expected\n piece of content was rendered in the JSR286 Web Content Viewer.

","modified":"2021-05-08T00:35:03.346Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"shrink-windows-vm-on-vmware-fusion-for-mac","title":"How to Shrink a Windows VM on VMWare Fusion for Mac","description":"Procedure for shrinking a Windows virtual machine on VMWare Fusion for the Mac.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-vmware-fusion.png","created":"2013-01-05T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-08T00:28:48.392Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

Here's my procedure for shrinking a Windows virtual machine on VMWare Fusion for the Mac.

\n\n

Make a backup of the VM (just to be on the safe side).
Remove any snapshots; you can’t reclaim disk space on a VM that has them.
From within the Windows VM, clean up files and defrag the hard drive (Run Disk Cleanup, delete unused\n files, uninstall anything you don’t need, empty the recycle bin, delete the browser caches, etc., etc.\n Then defragment the hard-drive inside the Windows VM.)
Zap the unused disk space
\n – Download SDelete into the Windows VM. I like to put sdelete.exe directly in C: (root) on\n all my VMs so that I know it’s always there in that convenient spot when it’s time to compress the VM\n again.
\n – In a command prompt, execute “sdelete -z c:” to zap all the free disk space on the C drive
Shut down the Windows VM and quit VMWare Fusion.
Go to Window > Virtual Machines Library, select the VM and then click the icon to Refresh Disk Space\n (as shown below)…
\n $\"\"$
Finally, go to Virtual Machines > Settings… > General and click the Clean Up Virtual Machine\n button to reclaim disk space (shown below)…
\n $\"\"$

","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"user-impersonation-in-websphere-portal-video-demo","title":"User Impersonation in WebSphere Portal - Video Demo","description":"A video demonstration about how to take on the profile of other users without having to know their login credentials.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2013-01-04T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

User Impersonation is a feature in WebSphere Portal that allows select\n\t\t\tadministrative users to take on the profile of other users without having to know their login credentials.\n\t\t\tThis allows the administrative user to evaluate the user experience from the impersonated user’s\n\t\t\tperspective. It can be quite handy for portals where security and personalization play a heavy role or where\n\t\t\thelp-desk and support staff really need to see exactly what the end-user sees. I created this screencast\n\t\t\tthat demonstrates how it works and even though it may be a little old, it’s still relevant…

\n\n\t\t

\n\t\t\t\n\t\t

\n","modified":"2021-05-08T00:33:32.870Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"how-to-make-your-rational-project-use-ant-for-automatic-build","title":"How to Make Your Rational Project Use Ant for Automatic Build","description":"You can configure your project to use an Apache Ant script to build automatically, rather than with the default Java Builder in Rational Application Developer (RAD).","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-eclipse.svg","created":"2012-12-30T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

$\"\"$ You can configure your project to use an Apache Ant script to build automatically, rather than\n with the default Java Builder in Rational Application Developer (RAD). This is valuable when you need a more\n sophisticated build process, but you still want the efficiency and convenience of an automatic build in\n the IDE. It’s alo useful if you simply need to trigger additional tasks after a ‘clean’, during a ‘clean’,\n in the manual build, or in the automatic build.

\n\n

Here’s how you set it up…

\n\n

Right-click on your project node in the explorer and select Properties from the context menu.

\n\n

Select ‘Builders’ in the dialog and then click the ‘New…’ button as shown below…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Then select the Ant Builder and click ‘OK’.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

On the Main tab of the builder configuration, click the ‘Browse Workspace…’ button and select your Ant\n build.xml file.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Next, click on the Targets tab. You’ll be able to choose a target in your Ant script to execute After a\n ‘Clean’, for the Manual Build, for the Auto Build, or during a ‘Clean’. For one or more of those options,\n click ‘Set Targets…’ and choose a target in the build script.

\n\n

$\"\"$ \n

\n\n

When you click OK to dismiss all the open dialogs, you will see your new Ant Builder in the list of builders\n applied to your project. You can then easily toggle the builder on or off or toggle between the Ant Builder\n and the default java Builder. It’s a lot more convenient than right-clicking your build file and selecting\n Run As > Ant Build every time you want to build from your Ant script.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Sounds useful, eh? Here’s just one example use case for this, which I know because it’s one I use myself…

\n\n

Suppose you have a commons project with a lot of utility classes that are bundled up in a JAR and used in\n multiple other projects. Using an Ant Builder, you could automatically distribute the modified JAR file to\n all projects in the workspace that use it.

\n\n

If you have any little not-so-obvious IDE tips like this, please share in the comments section of this page.

","modified":"2021-05-08T00:39:52.963Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"build-a-rendering-plugin-ibm-wcm-part-2","title":"Build a Rendering Plugin to Integrate Velocity with IBM WCM - Part 2","description":"Learn how to extend IBM Web Content Manager (WCM) with a custom rendering plugin - part 2 of 2.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2012-12-27T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"path":["blog"],"body":"

$\"\"$ Content Manager with a custom rendering plugin that integrates theApache Velocity Engine. This enables users to use Velocity templates within WCM content, which can give them JSP-like capabilities without the need for server-side deployments.

\n\n

In Part 1, we created a custom rendering plugin. We also brought the Apache Velocity template technology into the project and gave the plugin class a main method so that we could run a quick console test. So, we’ve proven the custom rendering plugin for WCM and we’ve also proven the Velocity Engine. Today, we’re going to weave the two together so that users can actually use the plugin’s custom tag to reference and render an HTML Component containing VTL (Velocity Template Language). When we’re done, the plugin’s tag will function when used like this:

\n\n

[Plugin:Velocity lib=\"Web Content\" cmpnt=\"HTML - My Velocity Template\" vars=\"name=Velocity | project=Jakarta\"]

\n\n

Where…

\n\n

lib specifies the name of the WCM library in which the given HTML component can be found
cmpnt specifies an HTML component containing VTL (Velocity Template Language)
vars specifies one or more key/value pairs representing variables that will be injected into the Velocity context

\n\n

Replace the Render Method

\n\n

Let’s start by replacing the render method of the plugin from Part 1.

\n\n

VelocityPlugin.java (download it, zipped)

\n\n

// These constants typically go at the top of the class, but are placed just above\n// this method for simplicity of this documentation...\n\npublic static final String CMPNT_NAME = "cmpnt";\npublic static final String LIBRARY_NAME = "lib";\npublic static final String CONTEXT_VARS = "vars";\n\npublic boolean render(final RenderingPluginModel p_model) throws RenderingPluginException {\n\nHttpServletRequest request = (HttpServletRequest) p_model.getRequest();\n\nfinal Map<String, List> params = p_model.getPluginParameters();\nfinal Writer writer = p_model.getWriter();\n\nString htmlCmpntName = null;\nString contextVariables = null;\n\ntry {\n\nif (!params.containsKey(CMPNT_NAME)) {\nwriter.write(" <span style="color: red">WCM Velocity plugin parameter '" + CMPNT_NAME + "' is required, but has either been omitted or mispelled.</span> ");\n}\nif (!params.containsKey(LIBRARY_NAME)) {\nwriter.write(" <span style="color: red">WCM Velocity plugin parameter '" + LIBRARY_NAME + "' is required, but has either been omitted or mispelled. ");\nwriter.write("Provide the name of the WCM library in which the HTML component can be found.</span> ");\n}\n\nif (params.containsKey(CMPNT_NAME) &amp;amp;&amp;amp; params.containsKey(LIBRARY_NAME)) {\n\nhtmlCmpntName = params.get(CMPNT_NAME).get(0);\n\nWorkspace workspace = WCM_API.getRepository().getSystemWorkspace();\n// Workspace workspace = WCM_API.getRepository().getWorkspace(request.getUserPrincipal());\n\nDocumentLibrary library = workspace.getDocumentLibrary(LIBRARY_NAME);\nif (library != null) {\nworkspace.setCurrentDocumentLibrary(library);\n}\n\nDocumentIdIterator docIds = workspace.findByName(DocumentTypes.HTMLComponent, htmlCmpntName);\n\nif (docIds.hasNext()) {\n\nDocumentId docId = (DocumentId) docIds.next();\n\nLibraryHTMLComponent cmpnt = (LibraryHTMLComponent) workspace.getById(docId);\nString rawTemplate = workspace.render(p_model.getRenderingContext(), cmpnt);\n\n/* Init the runtime engine. Defaults are fine. */\nVelocity.init();\n\nVelocityContext context = new VelocityContext();\n\nif (params.containsKey(CONTEXT_VARS)) {\n    contextVariables = params.get(CONTEXT_VARS).get(0);\n\n    if (contextVariables.contains("|") &amp;amp;&amp;amp; contextVariables.contains("=")) {\n        String[] keyValPairs = contextVariables.split("\\\\|");\n        for (int i = 0; i &amp;lt; keyValPairs.length; i++) {\n            String pair = keyValPairs[i];\n            if (pair.contains("=")) {\n                StringTokenizer st = new StringTokenizer(pair, "=");\n                while (st.hasMoreTokens()) {\n                    String key = st.nextToken().trim();\n                    String val = st.nextToken().trim();\n                    context.put(key, val);\n                }\n            }\n        }\n    }\n    else if (contextVariables.contains("=")) {\n        StringTokenizer st = new StringTokenizer(contextVariables, "=");\n        while (st.hasMoreTokens()) {\n            String key = st.nextToken().trim();\n            String val = st.nextToken().trim();\n            context.put(key, val);\n        }\n    }\n\n}\n\nStringWriter w = new StringWriter();\nVelocity.evaluate(context, w, "mystring", rawTemplate);\nwriter.write(w.toString());\n\n}\n\n}\n\n} catch (ServiceNotAvailableException e) {\n    e.printStackTrace();\n} catch (OperationFailedException e) {\n    e.printStackTrace();\n} catch (AuthorizationException e) {\n    e.printStackTrace();\n} catch (DocumentRetrievalException e) {\n    e.printStackTrace();\n} catch (IOException e) {\n    e.printStackTrace();\n}\n\n// determine whether inner contents of the plugin should be rendered\nfinal boolean renderBody;\n\nfinal List renderBodyList = params.get("renderbody");\n\nif (renderBodyList != null &amp;amp;&amp;amp; renderBodyList.get(0).equals("false")) {\nrenderBody = false;\n}\nelse {\nrenderBody = true;\n}\n\nreturn renderBody;\n}

\n\n

Here’s some information about what’s going on with the code above:

\n\n

Line 4,5,6: Constants representing the attribute names that can be used in the plugin’s custom tag.
Line 10: The ServletRequest returned by p_model.getRequest() is actually an HttpServletRequest, so it’s safe to cast it as such when we get a handle on it. We don’t actually use it now, but I’m guessing we might soon as we continue to evolve the plugin.
Lines 20-30: If the user doesn’t supply the expected attributes to the plugin’s tag, we write some red text that tells them so.
Line 32: To work with the WCM API, we must get a handle on the workspace. The workspace is the main interface to everything in WCM using the WCM API. In this case, we’re using the system workspace with full access to everything in WCM. The following line is commented out, but it shows you how you could get a workspace by logging in as the current user if you wanted to.
Lines 35-38: We attempt to set the current Document Library used by the workspace, which can hopefully help us avoid errors and make our operations more efficient.
Line 40: Just about everything in the WCM API extends from the Document class. This confused me when I first started working with the WCM API because I thought that Document meant content item (as opposed to a component, for example). That’s not the case. Document is simply the superclass for just about every model object you work with in the API. So anyway – this line searches for the given HTML component by name and returns an iterator of DocumentId objects.
Line 44: We only expect one component to be returned, so we only have to worry about dealing with the first in the iterator.
Line 46: And we expect it to be a LibraryHTMLComponent, so we cast it as such.
Line 47: We render the HTML component to get its contents, which will be the raw Velocity template (before being merged with objects in the Velocity context). You could use the API to just get the contents of the HTML element rather than rendering it, but if you did that, none of the WCM tags and references that might exist in the component would be properly rendered. You’d just get the raw source. In this case, we want WCM to render the component and then the results of that will be the raw Velocity template.
For the rest, we’re essentially doing the same thing that we did in Part 1 of this tutorial series. We are creating a Velocity context, shoving some objects into it, and then merging the context and the template in a rendering. We’re also parsing the value of the variables attribute if the user provides variables to the tag and then were injecting those into the Velocity context. This is the place where you could continue to evolve the plugin and put your own interesting objects into the context if you wanted to. My idea is that the plugin should allow users to define variables, but then also supply some interesting objects from Portal and WCM. That’s an exercise for a later day, perhaps.

\n\n

Setup a Simple Test Case and Test

\n\n

We can test the plugin now using a very simple test case comprised of two HTML components. One will contain the plugin’s tag and will reference the Velocity template. The other will be the template which contains VTL. Create the following two HTML components in WCM:

\n\n

HTML Component Name: HTML – Velocity Render Plugin Test
\n HTML Element Contents: [Plugin:Velocity lib=”Web Content” cmpnt=”HTML – My Velocity Template” vars=”name=Velocity|project=Jakarta”]

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

HTML Component Name: HTML – Velocity Render Plugin Test
\n HTML Element Contents: We are using $project $name to render this.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

After creating the two HTML components above, you can preview the first one (i.e. HTML – Velocity Plugin Test). If the stars are aligned just right, you should see a preview in which the variable placeholders used in the template are replaced with the values given for them in the tag.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Conclusion

\n\n

The plugin is now to a point where you can have some real fun with it. All we’ve done in our example is replace the variables $name and $project with the values we injected into the Velocity context. Without adding anymore to the plugin, there is a whole lot more VTL we could use. For just one simple example, you can use if/else statements, like this:

\n\n#if( $foo < 10 )\nGo North\n#elseif( $foo == 10 )\nGo East\n#elseif( $bar == 6 )\nGo South\n#else\nGo West\n#end\n\n

\n\n

See the Apache Velocity User Guide for more information about what you can do with velocity templates.

\n\n

Now, you should know that this code is probably not robust enough for a production deployment. I’ve handled a few exception cases gracefully, but not all. And I simply have not put this to any extended use to see how she holds up. But hopefully I’ve been able to inspire you to start thinking creatively about the kinds of things you can do in WCM using a custom rendering plugin.

\n\n

I would like to bring some Java object access to our Velocity context in a new part of this series, but hopefully, you know enough about this now to be dangerous on your own.

\n\n

Here’s the WAR and EAR projects for Rational or your Ecplipse-based IDE (unzip and import into your Rational workspace): VelocityRenderPluginProject-Part2.zip

\n\n

<< Previous: Part 1

\n","layoutName":"SidebarRight","modified":"2021-06-01T13:46:00.518Z","subtitle":""},{"_id":"build-a-rendering-plugin-ibm-wcm-part-1","title":"Build a Rendering Plugin to Integrate Velocity with IBM WCM","description":"Learn how to extend IBM Web Content Manager (WCM) with a custom rendering plugin - part 1 of 2.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2012-12-26T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

$\"\"$ In this multi-part series, you will learn how to make your developers and advanced content authors happy by extending IBM Web Content Manager (WCM) with a custom rendering plugin that integrates the Apache Velocity Engine. Your users will then be able to use Velocity templates within WCM content, which can give them JSP-like capabilities without the need for server-side deployments.

\n\n

Velocity Plugin for IBM WCM

A simple and powerful templating language
Variable assignment and reuse, if-else conditional logic and for-each looping
Access to Java objects and methods from within WCM content

\n\n

For this exercise, we will be developing on IBM WebSphere Portal v8 although I’m pretty sure this will all work the same or similarly on WebSphere Portal v7. For development, I’m using IBM Rational Software Architect v8.5, but Rational Application Developer or any Eclipse-based IDE will do. In this first part of the series, you will learn how to make a custom rendering plugin for WCM, which is an awesome thing to know in and of itself. In successive parts, we will then build upon this base to turn our plugin into a useful tool that will empower your WCM developers and advanced content authors to do even greater things with WCM.

\n\n

Lesson Plan

\n\n

Step One – Create a New Dynamic Web Project
Step Two – Create a Landing Page for Your plugin
Step Three – Add the EAR Project to the WebSphere Portal Server in Your IDE
Step Four – Start the Server and Test the Web App
Step Five – Create the Initial Rendering Plugin Class
Step Six – Create plugin.xml File
Step Seven – Test the plugin with WCM Content
Step Eight – Add Velocity Engine Java Libraries
Step Nine – Develop a Simple Console Test

\n\n

Step One – Create a New Dynamic Web Project

\n\n

You can create a WCM rendering plugin using just a .jar file, but building it as a web app allows us to more easily publish into WebSphere directly from our IDE. It also gives us more long-term flexibility. So, let’s start by building a new Dynamic Web App project…

\n\n

In Rational, select File > New Project

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

In the New Project dialog, select Dynamic Web Project under the Web category. You may need to check the Show All Wizards check-box in order to see the Web category.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Click the Next button. If you haven’t yet enabled all of the related activities in Rational, you may get a view asking you to. If so, enable them – of course. Otherwise, your next view is going to look like the following and you should fill it out as shown.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Click Next twice in order to get to the part where you can check the box to Generate web.xml deployment descriptor; we’ll need that.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Click Finish. You should end up with two projects in your IDE as shown; VelocityRenderPlugin and the EAR, VelocityRenderPluginEAR.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Step Two – Create a Landing Page for Your plugin

\n\n

Even though it isn’t necessary, I like to create a landing page for my plugin so that I have a place to write usage instructions and version information. It also helps administrators validate deployment of the plugin without having to go all the way into WCM.

\n\n

Right-click on the WebContent folder and choose New > JSP File.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Name the file index.jsp and click Finish.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

For now, I’ve just given a nice title to the page and put some handy links to the Apache Velocity Engine home page and the Velocity User Guide.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Step Three – Add the EAR Project to the WebSphere Portal Server in Your IDE

\n\n

If you’re using Rational, you can now add your EAR project to the server within your IDE. This will allow you to publish code changes rapidly as you work.

\n\n

Right-click on the IBM WebSphere Portal Server in the Servers view and the select Add and Remove… from the context menu.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Next, select the VelocityRenderPluginEAR project in the Available panel at left of the view and then click the ‘Add >’ button to move it over to the Configured panel on the right.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Click the ‘Finish’ button and then you should see that the project is added to your WebSphere Portal server as shown below…

\n\n

Step Four – Start the Server and Test the Web App

\n\n

Now, we can start the server and then access the index page to give the project a quick test. That is to say – we can check that it’s deploying to our portal server and we’re now ready to start coding.

\n\n

Right click in the WebSphere Portal Server in the Servers view and then select Start from the context menu or press CTRL + ALT + R.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

The Console view in Rational will start spitting out a bunch of log statements as the server starts and when the server has started, you should be able to access the web app in your browser at http://<host>:<port>/VelocityRenderPlugin/

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Cool beans and awesome sauce! This is confirmation that the basic web app is deploying properly and now we can start coding our plugin.

\n\n

Step Five – Create the Initial Rendering Plugin Class

\n\n

Next, we’ll stub-out the custom rendering plugin class. For this step, you might want to first review ‘Creating a rendering plugin class‘ in the IBM WebSphere Portal Family wiki.

\n\n

First, let’s create a Java package for our code. In your IDE, right-click on the src node and select New > Package from the context menu.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Fill in the name for your package and click the Finish button. I’m using the name ‘com.base22.wcm.plugin.rendering’…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Now, right-click on the Java package node and select New > Class…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Name the class “VelocityPlugin”. We’ll need to extend a particular interface, so before clicking Finish, click on the ‘Add…’ button to the right of the Interfaces field…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

This displays another dialog, where you can find interfaces that the class might implement. Type com.ibm.workplace.wcm.api.plugin.rendering.RenderingPlugin and then click OK.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

The RenderingPlugin interface should then show inside of the Interfaces field as shown below and you can click the Finish button.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

The Java class file is generated with all the methods from the RenderingPlugin interface stubbed out and ready for your implementation…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Copy the following code, and replace the contents of the VelocityPlugin.java file. This will give us something simple that we can use to perform another test to ensure the plugin is visible in the WCM Authoring interface and usable in WCM content.

\n\n

package com.base22.wcm.plugin.rendering;\n\nimport java.io.IOException;\nimport java.io.Writer;\nimport java.util.ArrayList;\nimport java.util.Iterator;\nimport java.util.List;\nimport java.util.Locale;\nimport java.util.Map;\nimport java.util.Set;\n\nimport com.ibm.portal.ListModel;\nimport com.ibm.portal.ModelException;\nimport com.ibm.workplace.wcm.api.plugin.rendering.RenderingPlugin;\nimport com.ibm.workplace.wcm.api.plugin.rendering.RenderingPluginException;\nimport com.ibm.workplace.wcm.api.plugin.rendering.RenderingPluginModel;\n\n/** * A rendering plugin that integrates the Velocity Template Engine with WCM. */\npublic class VelocityPlugin implements RenderingPlugin {\n\n    /** * A simple list model holding locales. */\n    protected static class SimpleLocaleListModel implements ListModel {\n\n        /** the list of locales of this list model */\n        final List m_localeList = new ArrayList();\n\n        /** * Constructs this simple list model holding the given locales. * * @param locales * the locales of this list model. May be <code>null</code>. */\n        public SimpleLocaleListModel(final Locale[] p_locales) {\n            if (p_locales != null) {\n            for (int i = 0; i < p_locales.length; ++i) {\n                m_localeList.add(p_locales[i]);\n            }\n            }\n        }\n\n        /* * (non-Javadoc) * * @see com.ibm.portal.ListModel#iterator() */\n        @Override\n        public Iterator iterator() throws ModelException {\n            return m_localeList.iterator();\n        }\n\n    }\n\n    /** a list model that only contains the English language locale */\n    private static final ListModel ENGLISH_ONLY = new SimpleLocaleListModel(new Locale[] { Locale.ENGLISH });\n\n    /* * (non-Javadoc) * * @see com.ibm.portal.Localized#getDescription(java.util.Locale) */\n    @Override\n    public String getDescription(final Locale p_locale) {\n        return "Provides ability to use Velocity Templates in WCM.";\n    }\n\n    /* * (non-Javadoc) * * @see com.ibm.portal.Localized#getLocales() */\n    @Override\n    public ListModel getLocales() {\n        return ENGLISH_ONLY;\n    }\n\n    /* * (non-Javadoc) * * @see com.ibm.workplace.wcm.api.plugin.rendering#getName() */\n    @Override\n    public String getName() {\n        return "Velocity";\n    }\n\n    /* * (non-Javadoc) * * @see com.ibm.portal.Localized#getTitle(java.util.Locale) */\n    @Override\n    public String getTitle(final Locale p_locale) {\n        return "Velocity";\n    }\n\n    /* * (non-Javadoc) * * @see * com.ibm.workplace.wcm.api.plugin.AuthoringPlugin#isShownInAuthoringUI() */\n    @Override\n    public boolean isShownInAuthoringUI() {\n        return true;\n    }\n\n    /* * (non-Javadoc) * * @see com.ibm.workplace.wcm.api.plugin.rendering.RenderingPlugin# * render(com.ibm.workplace.wcm.api .plugin.rendering.RenderingPluginModel) */\n    @Override\n    public boolean render(final RenderingPluginModel p_model) throws RenderingPluginException {\n        final Map<String, List> params = p_model.getPluginParameters();\n\n        // determine whether the inner contents of the plugin should actually be\n        // rendered\n        final boolean renderBody;\n        final List renderBodyList = params.get("renderbody");\n        if (renderBodyList != null && renderBodyList.get(0).equals("false")) {\n            renderBody = false;\n        } else {\n            renderBody = true;\n        }\n\n        // render the output of the plugin to the writer provided by the\n        // RenderingPluginModel\n        final Writer writer = p_model.getWriter();\n        try {\n            writer.write("<b>Velocity Rendering Plugin</b>");\n\n            final Set keys = params.keySet();\n\n            final Iterator iter = keys.iterator();\n            while (iter.hasNext()) {\n                String key = iter.next();\n                writer.write(" " + key + " = " + params.get(key));\n            }\n\n            writer.write(" ");\n        } catch (IOException e) {\n            e.printStackTrace();\n        }\n\n        return renderBody;\n    }\n\n}

\n\n

Step Six – Create plugin.xml File

\n\n

In order to register the plugin with WCM, we need to create a plugin.xml file and place it within our project’s WEB-INF directory…

\n\n

WEB-INF/plugin.xml

\n\n

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>\n<?eclipse version="3.0"?>\n<plugin id="com.base22.wcm.VelocityPlugin" name="Velocity Rendering Plugin" version="1.0.0" provider-name="Base22">\n<extension point="com.ibm.workplace.wcm.api.RenderingPlugin" id="VelocityPlugin">\n<provider class="com.base22.wcm.plugin.rendering.VelocityPlugin"/>\n</extension>\n</plugin>

\n\n

Pete Raleigh, IBM WebSphere Portal Consultant at IBM, posted the following comment on LinkedIn. While he was referring to Custom Workflow Actions and not WCM plugins, both use the same plugin.xml mechanism, so I thought I’d repost his comment here. Though I have not tested it, it may also hold true in this case. Thanks, Pete!

\n\n

When editing / creating a plugin.xml file for your Custom Workflow Actions, ensure the order of attributes for the “extension” tag are correct. They must have “point” first followed by “id”. If they are the other way around, they will not work. – Pete Raleigh

\n\n

Step Seven – Test the plugin with WCM Content

\n\n

Now, you can publish the application to your server and test using it’s tag WCM content.

\n\n

After publishing the web app, navigate into the WCM Authoring interface and create a new HTML component…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

When the new HTML Component form appears, click in the HTML Element field to place the cursor / caret there and then click the ‘Insert a Tag’ button.

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

A pop-up window appears.

\n\n

Select ‘Plugin Component’ for the tag type and then ‘Velocity’ as the plugin to reference as shown…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

When you click OK, the tag should appear in your HTML Element field as shown…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

The stub code we’ve used is written to accept and echo back any arbitrary attribute and attribute values given to the tag, so let’s type some in like so…

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Now save and preview the HTML Component and you should see the following result in your browser:

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Step Eight – Add Velocity Engine Java Libraries

\n\n

Next, we need to add the Velocity Engine library and its dependencies.

\n\n

Download the latest stable version of Velocity (that’s velocity-1.7.zip at the time of this writing).

\n\n

In the root of the archive, you will find velocity-17.jar, which you’ll need to place in the project’s WEB-INF/lib folder. There’s also a lib directory in the archive containing some dependency jar files you’ll also need to put in WEB-INF/lib; they are avalon-logkit, commons-collections, commons-lang, and oro. You’re WEB-INF/lib directory should look the same or similar to what’s depicted below:

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Step Nine – Develop a Simple Console Test

\n\n

One quick and simple way to validate functionality is to add a main method to your class. This will allow you execute the class in order to perform some quick validation tests outside of the normal deployment to WebSphere. First, add the following two methods two the VelocityPlugin.java file.

\n\n

public String getRenderedTemplate() {\n    /* first, we init the runtime engine. Defaults are fine. */\n    Velocity.init();\n\n    /* lets make a Context and put data into it */\n    VelocityContext context = new VelocityContext();\n    context.put("name", "Velocity");\n    context.put("project", "Jakarta");\n\n    StringWriter w = new StringWriter();\n    String s = "We are using $project $name to render this.";\n    Velocity.evaluate( context, w, "mystring", s );\n\n    return w.toString();\n}\n\n/** * A main method for convenient console testing... */\npublic static void main(String[] args) {\n    VelocityPlugin plugin = new VelocityPlugin();\n    System.out.println( plugin.getRenderedTemplate() );\n}

\n\n

Note that with the addition of these methods, you’ll also need to add the following imports:

\n\nimport java.io.StringWriter;\nimport org.apache.velocity.VelocityContext;\nimport org.apache.velocity.app.Velocity;\n\n

The main method initializes an instance of the VelocityPlugin class and then calls the getRenderedTemplate() method – printing the resulting string to the console.
First, we initialize the Velocity runtime engine.
We then create a VelocityContext. The context is sort of like a HashMap in which we can put key/value pairs. Anything put into the context will be accessible from the user’s template as variables such as ‘name’ and ‘project’.
A simple template is written in VTL. As our plugin progresses, we’ll give users the ability to put templates into HTML Components or File Resources in WCM, but for now, this will prove that everything’s hooked up properly. Notice that the template contains variable placeholders to access values that are expected to be in the context ($project and $name; variables in VTL are preceded with a dollar sign)
We merge the template with the context and push the rendered results of that merge into a StringWriter.
Finally, we return the rendered results as a String, which are then printed to the console.

\n\n

If all goes well, the output should be printed to the Console view in your IDE as shown below:

\n\n

$\"\"$

\n\n

Voila! The variable $project was replaced with the value, ‘Jakarta’ that was placed in the Velocity context and the variable $name was replaced with the value ‘Velocity’.

\n\n

Hopefully, at this point, you’re starting to see the value in this. Yes – this means that anything we shove into the Velocity context will be accessible to developers and authors from within WCM content. That could be user profile attributes, objects from the WCM or Portal APIs, values from a back-end database, or whatever.

\n\n

Conclusion

\n\n

In today’s class, we learned how to make a custom rendering plugin for WCM. We also learned how to incorporate the Velocity Engine into our code.

\n\n

In part 2 of this series, we’re going to take our plugin to the next level by making it so that Velocity templates can be written inside of HTML Components and then referenced by an attribute in our custom tag like this:

\n\n

[Velocity lib=”Web Content” cmpnt=”HTML – My Velocity Template” vars=”name=Velocity | project=Jakarta”]

\n\n

>> Next: Part 2

\n\n

Reference Resources

\n\n

Following are some of the reference resources I used to research and write this article.

Apache Velocity Site – Velocity Engine – Velocity is a Java-based template engine. It permits anyone to use a simple yet powerful template language to reference objects defined in Java code.\n
- Apache Velocity 1.7 User Guide – The Velocity User Guide is intended to help page designers and content providers get acquainted with Velocity and the syntax of its simple yet powerful scripting language, the Velocity Template Language (VTL).
\n
Creating custom plugins – WebSphere Portal Family wiki documentation on the various plugin types you can develop for IBM WCM.\n
- Creating a rendering plugin class – WebSphere Portal Family wiki documentation on the rendering plugin type upon which this article is based.
\n

","modified":"2021-09-14T19:19:42.630Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":"","ogImage":""},{"_id":"websphere-federated-repository-lesson-learned","title":"WebSphere Federated Repository - Lesson Learned","description":"Why you should leave the wasadmin and wpsadmin users in the defaultWIMFileBasedRealm and how to do it properly.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/2018/07/DManager150x150.png","created":"2012-12-19T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

$\"\"\n\t\t\t\twidth=\"150\"$ When configuring WebSphere Portal to use the federated repository for\n\t\t\tnon-prod environments, you have the option to leave the wasadmin and wpsadmin users in the\n\t\t\tdefaultWIMFileBasedRealm. With this configuration, you should be able to login to the deployment manager and\n\t\t\tWebSphere Portal even if your federated user repository is down. I learned today, however, that it’s not\n\t\t\tenough to simply leave the administrative users there. There’s also a very important configuration option\n\t\t\tthat must be checked or the whole plan is kaput.

\n\n\t\t

In the WebSphere Integrated Solutions Console (WAS admin interface, deployment manager), under Security,\n\t\t\tclick Global Security as indicated below…

\n\n\t\t

$\"\"$ \n\t\t

\n\n\t\t

Next, click the ‘Configure…’ button for the Federated repositories realm definition…

\n\n\t\t

Check the checkbox to Allow operations if some of the repositories are down as shown below. If you don’t do\n\t\t\tthat then everything’s dead after one of your repositories fail, so it wouldn’t even matter that your\n\t\t\tadministrative users are still in the defaultWIMFIleBasedRealm.

\n\n\t\t

Recently we changed our Active Directory (AD) server configuration and I needed to access my Deployment\n\t\t\tManager to change the AD host, but I could not login to the Deployment Manager because I’d overlooked this\n\t\t\tsetting. Both me and one of my colleagues burned some valuable time getting around this. So, if you’re\n\t\t\tcounting on this strategy to save you too, perhaps you should double-check this setting now\n\t\t\t– before you have to actually rely on it.

\n","modified":"2021-05-08T00:36:41.369Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"logging-through-websphere-portal-from-java-and-jsps","title":"Logging Through WebSphere Portal From Java and JSPs","description":"Learn how to tap into the WebSphere Portal logging system so that admins can enable tracing for your application classes.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2012-07-31T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

Recently, I wanted to tap into the WebSphere Portal logging system so that administrators can toggle tracing\n for my application classes at runtime by using the Enable Tracing feature in the WebSphere Portal Admin UI.\n

\n\n

I was attempting the typical java.util.logging business like this:

\n\n

Imports

\n\n import java.util.logging.Level;\nimport java.util.logging.Logger;\n\n

Declare the Logger

\n\n public static final Logger LOG = Logger.getLogger(PDFUtils.class.getName());\n \n\n

Use the Logger (well, attempt to…)

\n\n if(LOG.isLoggable(Level.FINEST)) {\n LOG.finest(\"HELLO WORLD!\");\n}\n\n

Problem

\n\n

I would then navigate to Portal Admin > Enable Tracing and add com.base22.*=finest, but none of my\n statements ever spit out to my console in Rational Software Architect or to WebSphere Portal’s\n SystemOut.log file. As it turns out, “log entries lower than WsLevel.DETAIL are never stored in the\n SystemOut.log file”. After much searching, I finally learned this from a post found online called LOGGING AND\n TRACING FROM A WEBSPHERE BASED J2EE APPLICATION.

\n\n

Solution

\n\n

My final solution was to include an import for the WebSphere specific levels like so…

\n\n import com.ibm.websphere.logging.WsLevel;\n \n\n

.. and then modify my logging statements to key off of WsLevel.DETAIL, which FINE, FINER, and FINEST roll up\n into; like this:

\n\n if (LOG.isLoggable(WsLevel.DETAIL)) {\n LOG.log(WsLevel.DETAIL,\">> writePDFFromContentToOutputStream()\");\n}\n\n

Hopefully this will save you the time it took me to whittle trough it.

","modified":"2021-05-08T00:44:21.315Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"permitting-author-access-to-search-collection-in-wcm-search-component","title":"Permitting Author Access to the Search Collection in a WCM search Component","description":"WCM developers who have editor access to a search component may not have appropriate access to the search collection that the component refers to. Here's how to fix that.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2011-09-25T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

WCM developers who have editor access to a search component may not have appropriate access to the search collection that the component refers to. In this case, the WCM developer may see a warning message in the WCM authoring UI, which states: “The search collection: <CollectionName> could not be found. Please create the collection or select another one.” The search collection selected in the component will also be tagged as [missing].

\n\n

This can be corrected by giving the WCM search component editor appropriate access to the collection using the Access area within the Portal admin interface.

\n\n

Here’s how:

\n\n

Login as a portal administrator and navigate to Access > Resource Permissions and click on PSE Sources.
Locate the collection that the WCM search component refers to and then click the key icon to assign access.
The various access roles for the resource will appear. Click on the pencil icon for the Editor role.
Add the group or users who should have editor access to the WCM search component that refers to the collection. Then click the collection name in the breadcrumb to move up a level where you can click to Apply the changes.
Now, the editor should have access to the PSE source (the collection) from within the WCM search component. The warning message should no longer be displayed and the search collection should no longer be flagged as [missing].

\n\n

With this tip, you should be able to ease concerns that your WCM search component developers might have. If the same developers do not have access to the search administration area of the Portal admin UI, you should not be concerned about their ability to edit attributes of the collection itself.

\n","modified":"2021-06-01T14:01:27.513Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"user-impersonation-programming-in-websphere-portal","title":"User Impersonation Programming in WebSphere Portal","description":"Learn how to program the user impersonation feature in HCL Portal, which allows specified users or groups the ability to assume the profile of others.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2011-07-31T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

The user impersonation feature in WebSphere Portal allows specified users or groups the ability to assume the\n profile of others. In this way, administrators or help-desk staff can view a personalized and secured portal\n the way another end-user sees it. Of course, depending on the types of content and services you provide,\n this could be a security risk. If you have features that should not be accessed, even in impersonated\n sessions, you may need to wrap those features with some specialized logic. In this post, I show you how.

\n\n

Accessing the ImpersonationService in Your Java Code

\n\n

First, you’ll need to access the ImpersonationService in your theme or portlet code. The example below uses a\n JNDI lookup, which can be expensive, so be sure to put these kinds of things in an init method.

\n\n

try {\n  portletServiceHome = (com.ibm.portal.portlet.service.PortletServiceHome)ctx.lookup(com.ibm.portal.portlet.service.impersonation.ImpersonationService.JNDI_NAME);\n  if(portletServiceHome != null) {\n    impersonationHome = (com.ibm.portal.portlet.service.impersonation.ImpersonationService) portletServiceHome.getPortletService(com.ibm.portal.portlet.service.impersonation.ImpersonationService.class);\n    if( impersonationHome != null ) {\n      isImpersonationEnabled = true;\n    }\n  }\n} catch ( javax.naming.NamingException ne ) {\n  // impersonation is not present\n} catch ( com.ibm.portal.portlet.service.PortletServiceUnavailableException psue ) {\n  // impersonation is not present\n}\n

\n\n

That’s how the PageBuilder theme does it. Here’s another example from the SPIs JavaDoc on how to perform the\n JNDI lookup to acquire the service object:

\n\n

com.ibm.portal.portlet.service.PortletServiceHome psh;\njavax.naming.Context ctx = new javax.naming.InitialContext();\n \ntry {\n    psh = (PortletServiceHome) ctx.lookup(ImpersonationService.JNDI_NAME);\n} catch(javax.naming.NameNotFoundException ex) {\n    // error handling\n}\n \n// obtain the service object and use the service\nImpersonationService impersonationService = (ImpersonationService) psh.getPortletService(ImpersonationService.class);\ntry {\n    impersonationService.doImpersonate(request, response, request.getParameter(FORM_TEXT));\n} catch (Exception e) {\n    // error handling\n}

\n\n

Using the ImpersonationService in Your Java Code

\n\n

Once you have access to the service, you can use the following method to determine if the current user is an\n impersonated user (returns a boolean):

\n\n

impersonationHome.isUserImpersonated()

\n\n

There are other useful methods on the ImpersonationService. Following are all the methods as of WebSphere\n Portal 7.0.0.

\n\n

Interface com.ibm.portal.portlet.service.impersonation.ImpersonationService

\n\n

void doImpersonate(ActionRequest actionRequest, ActionResponse actionResponse, java.lang.String impUserDN)
\n This method starts the impersonation.

\n\n

void doImpersonate(ActionRequest actionRequest, ActionResponse actionResponse, User impUser)
\n This method starts the impersonation.

\n\n

void doImpersonate(PortletRequest portletRequest, PortletResponse portletResponse, java.lang.String impUserDN)
\n Deprecated. since 7.0 use doImpersonate(ActionRequest, ActionResponse, String) instead

\n\n

void doImpersonate(PortletRequest portletRequest, PortletResponse portletResponse, User impUser)
\n Deprecated. since 7.0 use doImpersonate(ActionRequest, ActionResponse, User) instead

\n\n

User getOriginalUser()
\n This method returns the original user that has logged in.

\n\n

boolean isUserImpersonated()
\n This method indicates whether the current user has been impersonated or he is acting on its own behalf.

\n\n

void loginOriginalUser(HttpServletRequest aRequest, HttpServletResponse aResponse) Deprecated.\n since 7.0 use
\n com.ibm.portal.impersonation.ImpersonationService#loginOriginalUser(HttpServletRequest, HttpServletResponse)\n instead

","modified":"2021-05-08T00:43:15.881Z","features":["syntax highlighter"],"path":["blog"]},{"_id":"find-java-classes-or-packages-contained-in-jar-files","title":"Find Java Classes or Packages Contained in JAR Files","description":"Here's a tool that can help you search through JAR files to find Java classes or packages.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-java.svg","created":"2011-04-18T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

Did you know there’s a tool that can help you search through JAR files to find Java classes or packages? I’ve been using it for years and I am often surprised that so few Java developers have it in their toolbox. Of course, it’s very handy for resolving those pesky NoClassDefFoundError and ClassNotFoundExceptions, but my favorite use case is to find the location of a class and JAR file on my hard-drive so I can decompile it to understand what some vendor’s proprietary code is actually doing behind the scenes. I know vendors frown on this, but whatever; I’ve got a job to do.

The tool is called jarscan and you can read more about it or download it here.

It’s just a little jar file that executes as a command-line program. On my Windows virtual machines, I put the jar file in C:\\JarScanner\\

If you’d like to find a Java class called “SystemProperty” somewhere in the “C:\\IBM\\WebSphere\\PortalServer” directory. You would execute the following command:

java -jar C:\\JarScanner\\jarscan.jar -dir c:\\IBM\\WebSphere\\PortalServer -class SystemProperty

That command would then search through every jar file that it can find in the PortalServer directory, including sub-directories. If it finds the specified class file, it reports the location and name of the Jar file containing the class. You can also search for packages, not just class files.

For Help, type the following command:

java -jar C:\\JarScanner\\jarscan.jar -help

Shout out to Geoff Yaworski for building this handy tool (there’s a PayPal donate link on his site)

","modified":"2021-06-18T17:57:13.264Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","ogImage":"","subtitle":""},{"_id":"classnotfound-does-not-always-mean-class-not-found","title":"ClassNotFound Does Not Always Mean Class Not Found","description":"Sometimes ClassNotFound can mean the class was actually found 2 or more times - a conflict in the classloader.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-java.svg","created":"2011-02-06T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

$\"Java$ A Java ClassNotFound exception does not always mean that a class could not be found on the classpath. Sometimes it can mean the class was actually found 2 or more times – a conflict in the classloader.

Recently, while developing a portlet for WebSphere Portal, I got the following exception:

Caused by: java.lang.ClassNotFoundException: javax.el.ELException

My portlet ran fine in my local development environment, but when I deployed it to Production, it crapped out. This is because I had included JSTL jar files in my portlet’s WEB-INF/lib folder. As it turns out, those jar files, or similar ones, were already somewhere on the classpath in the Production environment.

So…It seems that the class was actually found – just more times than expected. It is as if the classloader cancels them all out if it finds duplicates or conflicts. This, in turn, can lead to the ClassNotFound message, which in that case is somewhat misleading.

Just something to keep in mind.

","modified":"2022-02-17T01:56:46.693Z","path":["blog"],"features":[],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","ogImage":"","subtitle":""},{"_id":"introduction-to-the-semantic-web-vision-and-technologies","title":"Introduction to the Semantic Web Vision and Technologies","description":"Video version of a PowerPoint presentation for a talk I gave at the IBM Technical Leadership Exchange in March, 2006.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-semantic-web.svg","created":"2010-09-13T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

This is the video version of the PowerPoint presentation for a talk I gave at the IBM Technical Leadership Exchange in March, 2006. The presentation, which is now quite dated, provides a summary of the vision and technologies related to the Semantic Web, which was arguably considered to be emergent for the time. Related, but more modern concepts that have since surfaced include Linked Data, Linked Data Platform, and Graph Databases (e.g. Amazon Neptune, Blazegraph, Stardog, Ontotext GraphDB).

\n\n

\n \t\n

\n\n

Download this presentation as a Microsoft PowerPoint file (1,881 KB zipped, 2,087 KB unzipped):

emt-070_semantic-web-vision-and-tech_2006-03-08.zip

\n","modified":"2021-07-18T23:18:29.230Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","ogImage":"","subtitle":""},{"_id":"remove-sign-up-link-on-wps-login-page","title":"How to Remove the Sign-Up Link on the WebSphere Portal Login Page","description":"When sign-up capability is not desired, here’s how to remove the sign-up link from the login portlet.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2010-06-14T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

The Login form on the login page comes from a portlet. The sign-up link that appears on the login page comes from this portlet. In many cases, anonymous access to the portal is not given or the sign-up capability is not desired. Here’s how to remove the sign-up link from the portlet (it is a configurable parameter):

\n\n\t\t

In Portal Admin, navigate to Portlets (under Portlet Management).
\n\t\t\t\tFind the “Login” portlet and click on the wrench icon (Configure portlet).
One of the parameters on the portlet is “ShowSignupLink”, which can be given the value “yes” or “no”.
Simply change the value as appropriate and commit the changes by pressing what ever logical “OK” or “Apply” buttons that follow.

\n","modified":"2021-05-08T00:49:43.791Z","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"wcm-security-video-overview","title":"WCM Security - Video Overview","description":"A 10 minute Lunch Byte to help you improve your skills using security in IBM Workplace Web Content Management.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2010-05-01T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

A 10 minute Lunch Byte in a series designed to help you improve your skills in developing websites using IBM Workplace Web Content Management. This episode focuses on WCM security.

\n\t\t

","modified":"2021-06-01T14:02:55.177Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"wcm-libraries-video-overview","title":"WCM Libraries - Video Overview","description":"Understand the role and capabilities of a Library in IBM Web Content Manager.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-websphere.png","created":"2010-01-02T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

A 10 minute Lunch Byte in a series designed to help you improve your skills in developing websites using IBM Workplace Web Content Management. This episode focuses on the role and capabilities of a Library in WCM.

\n\n

","modified":"2021-06-01T04:55:03.584Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"render-the-keys-and-values-from-a-map-in-freemarker","title":"Render the Keys and Values From a Map in Freemarker","description":"How to get the keys and values of a Map (such as a HashMap) from within a Freemarker template.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-java.svg","created":"2009-12-24T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Render the values of a Map

\n\n

The following code snippet shows how to get the values of a Map (e.g. HashMap) from within a Freemarker\n template.

\n\n

<#assign m = myMap>\n<#assign values = m?values>\n         \n<ul>\n     <#list values as myObject>\n     <li>$\\{myObject.myPropery\\}</li>\n     </#list>\n</ul>

\n\n

Render the keys of a Map

\n\n

You can do a similar thing with the keys of a map as shown below.

\n\n

<#assign m = myMap>\n<#assign keys = m?keys>\n         \n<ul>\n     <#list keys as key>\n     <li>$\\{key\\}\n     </#list>\n</ul>

","modified":"2021-06-01T04:49:35.237Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"ldap-error-codes","title":"LDAP Error Codes","description":"A reference table of common LDAP error codes and error constants with possible causes.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-ldap.svg","created":"2009-11-21T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":" \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

ERROR CODE	LDAPEXCEPTION CONSTANT	POSSIBLE CAUSE(S)
0	SUCCESS	The operation completed successfully
1	OPERATION_ERROR	Invalid syntax for ACI or schema, or inappropriate control for the operation
2	PROTOCOL_ERROR	Invalid filter expression on search, or DN on add, modify, or delete
3	TIME_LIMIT_EXCEEDED	Either the server’s or the client’s specified search time limit was exceeded
4	SIZE_LIMIT_EXCEEDED	Either the server’s or the client’s specified limit on number of search results was exceeded
5	COMPARE_FALSE	A compare operation returns mismatch
6	COMPARE_TRUE	A compare operation returns match
7	AUTH_METHOD_NOT_SUPPORTED	The server does not support the requested authentication method
8	STRONG_AUTH_REQUIRED	The server requires an authentication method stronger than unencrypted user name and password
9	LDAP_PARTIAL_RESULTS	The client has bound with LDAPv2, or the server supports only LDAPv2, and the base DN specified by the client is not among the naming contexts of the server
10	REFERRAL	The server is configured to return a referral or search reference when an operation is directed toward this DN
11	ADMIN_LIMIT_EXCEEDED	To satisfy the search request, the server would need to process too many entries; the search may need to be narrowed, or the server’s look-through limit raised
12	UNAVAILABLE_CRITICAL_EXTENSION	A control was provided with the request; the control was tagged as critical, but the server doesn’t support it
13	CONFIDENTIALITY_REQUIRED	.
14	SASL_BIND_IN_PROGRESS	SASL authentication is being negotiated between the client and the server
16	NO_SUCH_ATTRIBUTE	An attribute to be modified or deleted was not present in the entry
17	UNDEFINED_ATTRIBUTE_TYPE	.
18	INAPPROPRIATE_MATCHING	.
19	CONSTRAINT_VIOLATION	Invalid attribute for this entry, or new password does not meet password policy requirements
20	ATTRIBUTE_OR_VALUE_EXISTS	Attempt to add an identical attribute value to an existing one
21	INVALID_ATTRIBUTE_SYNTAX	.
32	NO_SUCH_OBJECT	Attempt to bind with a nonexistent DN, to search with a nonexistent base DN, or to modify or delete a nonexistent DN
33	ALIAS_PROBLEM	.
34	INVALID_DN_SYNTAX	Invalid DN or RDN specified on adding an entry or modifying an RDN
35	IS_LEAF	.
36	ALIAS_DEREFERENCING_PROBLEM	.
48	INAPPROPRIATE_AUTHENTICATION	.
49	INVALID_CREDENTIALS	Invalid password or other credentials supplied on bind
50	INSUFFICIENT_ACCESS_RIGHTS	.
51	BUSY	.
52	UNAVAILABLE	Returned by SDK if server is not accessible
53	UNWILLING_TO_PERFORM	User not allowed to change password, password expired, operation not implemented (moddn), attempt to modify read-only attribute, attempt to delete all schema elements, attempt to delete an object class that has derived object classes, attempt to delete a read-only schema element, the database is read-only, no back end (database) is available for the operation, or other uncategorized error
54	LOOP_DETECT	.
64	NAMING_VIOLATION	.
65	OBJECT_CLASS_VIOLATION	Invalid attribute specified for modify operation on an entry
66	NOT_ALLOWED_ON_NONLEAF	Attempt to delete an entry that has child nodes
67	NOT_ALLOWED_ON_RDN	.
68	ENTRY_ALREADY_EXISTS	.
69	OBJECT_CLASS_MODS_PROHIBITED	.
71	AFFECTS_MULTIPLE_DSAS	.
80	OTHER	.
81	SERVER_DOWN	SDK could not connect to server
89	PARAM_ERROR	No modifications on a modify operation, no attributes on an add operation, invalid scope or empty search filter on search, or other invalid argument to an SDK method
91	CONNECT_ERROR	SDK reports unexpected error connecting to server
92	LDAP_NOT_SUPPORTED	.
93	CONTROL_NOT_FOUND	.
94	NO_RESULTS_RETURNED	.
95	MORE_RESULTS_TO_RETURN	.
96	CLIENT_LOOP	.
97	REFERRAL_LIMIT_EXCEEDED	SDK reports hop limit exceeded on referral processing

","modified":"2021-06-01T04:51:15.958Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"glossary-of-ldap-acronyms-and-terms","title":"Glossary of LDAP Acronyms and Terms","description":"A glossary of commonly used acronyms and terms related to LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) and LDIF (LDAP Data Interchange Format).","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-ldap.svg","created":"2009-11-20T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-05-08T00:49:14.567Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

abstract (object classes)
\n Abstract classes are used to build other object classes, but never for building direct instances of the class. A special abstract class called top is the ultimate superclass of all object classes. To build a class that doesn’t inherit any attributes, you build a class that is a direct subclass of top.

ApacheDS
\n ApacheDS (Apache Directory Server) is an embeddable, extendable, standards compliant, modern LDAP server written entirely in Java, and available under the Apache Software License.

auxiliary (object classes)
\n You use auxiliary classes to mix and match. An auxiliary class augments the other object classes of an entry without the costs tied to inheritance. The auxiliary class is never involved in inheritance because it is never the super class for a structural or abstract class. Instead, auxiliary classes are explicitly included in an entry rather than included implicitly via inheritance. You use auxiliary classes to add specific functionality to a standard object class without modifying the original object definition. The same auxiliary class may be added to entries with different object classes and this is the most significant advantage of the auxiliary class. In other words, the auxiliary class is not part of a chain of inheritance and you can use it with entries of differing classes.

So, which is better: inheritance or Auxiliary class? The main thing to consider is the users who must create new entries. They must explicitly include both object classes unless you have some kind of user interface that abstracts this from them. If you use inheritance instead, they need to include only one object class. With the auxiliary option, problems can occur if a user forgets one of the object classes.

c
\n Country

cn
\n common name

If the object holding this attribute corresponds to a person, it is typically the person’s full name.

dc
\n Domain Component

DIT
\n Directory Information Tree

DN
\n Distinguished Name

l
\n Location

LDIF
\n LDAP Data Interchange Format
\n Example LDIF file with organizational and person entries:

\n\n\n

\ndn: o=burlesontech.com\nobjectclass: top\nobjectclass: organization\no: burlesontech.com\n\ndn: ou=People, o=burlesontech.com\nobjectclass: organizationalUnit\nou: people\n\ndn: ou=marketing, o=burlesontech.com\nobjectclass: organizationalUnit\nou: marketing\n\ndn: cn=Cody Burleson, ou=people, o=burlesontech.com\nobjectclass: top\nobjectclass: organizationalPerson\ncn: Cody Burleson\nsn: Burleson\ngivenname: Cody\nuid: cburleson\nou: marketing\n

\n\n\n

o
Organization

OID
Object Identifier used to uniquely name each entity in the LDAP schema. The syntax is a string of numbers separated by periods. For example:

\n\n

2.16.840.1.113730.3.2.2

\n\n

The string can be of any length and can contain any number of segments. The left-most segments are considered ‘most significant’. An OID can be subdivided simply by adding more segments to the end; the collective group of all OIDs beginning with a specific series of numbers is commonly called an ‘arch’.

\n\n

Since OIDs are hierarchical, your organization can obtain one OID and then branch it as needed. For example, if your organization’s OID was 1.1, you could use 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 1.1.3, 1.1.3.1, etc. A root OID for your organization, a.k.a. Private Enterprise Number (PEN), can be obtained from IANA, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority. You can typically receive a PEN within a few days after applying online although IANA commits only to a minimum of 30 days.

\n\n

There is a specific arch that is reserved for private use within an enterprise. That arch is 1.3.6.1.4.1. Following the private-OID arch, organizations add their own Private Enterprise Number (PEN) to form a sub-arch that belongs totally to that organization and is globally unique. My company, Burleson Technology Group, has been assigned the Private Enterprise Number 31751, so our LDAP arch is 1.3.6.1.4.1.31751. Thus, if we created any unique entities in our LDAP schema, that’s the arch we would start with. We could, of course, branch it or add to the end, so that OIDs like 1.3.6.1.4.1.31751.1 or 1.3.6.1.4.1.31751.1.2.1 would be valid for our schema.

\n\n

There is a specific arch (1.3.6.1.3) which is reserved by the IANA for experimentation and you can assign OIDs within this arch for temporary purposes, such as testing or for experimenting with your schema while waiting for your permanent PEN. OIDs within this experimental arch are not guaranteed to be globally unique, and therefore should not be published external to your organization nor used for production LDAP directories.

\n\n

Organizational Unit
OUs are typically used to create a hierarchy of containers within a domain. Only OUs within the same domain can have relationships. OUs of the same name in different domains are independent.

\n\n

RDN
Relative Distinuished Name

\n\n

Surname

The family name (last name) of a person

\n\n

st
State

\n\n

structural (object classes)
\n Each directory entry (instance) must contain at least one structural class. A structural class always uses inheritance, and it must be a subclass of some other object class. Only structural classes can use inheritance; abstract and auxiliary classes cannot use inheritance. A structural class can be a super class of another object class.

uid
User ID

","path":["blog"]},{"_id":"are-mashups-the-new-portals-and-gadgets-the-new-portlets","title":"Are Mashups the New Portals and Gadgets the New Portlets?","description":"What it means to be a portal and a portlet may be changing. Here's why.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/webpage-icon.png","created":"2009-06-12T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

What it means to be a portal and a portlet may be changing. With Google Gadgets, OpenSocial, and Apache Shindig, application functionality can now be delivered to any page on the web, backed by any variety of web and application servers. Using only HTML, JavaScript, and REST/RPC protocols, gadgets are more universal than JSR 168 Portlets and arguably more amenable to rich internet application techniques like Ajax. Gadgets go hand-in-hand with OpenSocial, a common API that can help you bring social networking features to your applications. With OpenSocial, it is possible to extend the range of your apps and evolve towards Enterprise 2.0 while adhering to a service oriented model. Shindig is an OpenSocial container from Apache that can help you make any website capable of hosting these gadgets and social apps. Taken together, these kinds of technologies have to make one wonder if the days of the monolithic enterprise portal platform are nearing an end.

As a former consultant for PricewaterhouseCoopers and IBM, I have spent many years working to help companies realize the promise of an enterprise portal: one consistent interface to the enterprise, a common development platform, common infrastructure, standardized application architecture, employee self-service, security, personalization, content management, application integration, single sign-on, and the like. IBM WebSphere Portal, Oracle WebLogic Portal, and SAP NetWeaver Portal are just a few of the platforms I’ve worked with that promise to deliver all this value in a single package. But if there is one thing I’ve learned from my experience with these behemoths, it is that tapping that value and getting honest-to-goodness ROI in a large organization is incredibly hard. In fact, professional consultants have coined a term to describe the feeling customers have after a year or more of design, installation, customization, configuration and tuning – we call it “portal fatigue”.

The fact is that while the promise is noble, integrating a large enterprise on one platform does not honor the reality in most organizations. For one thing, it presents a huge governance challenge. It requires C-level sponsorship, unification across organizational boundaries, an integrated funding model, and centralized management that can deal with being blamed for any individual problem that makes the whole thing look bad. Building an enterprise portal is difficult in itself – running it efficiently is then an entirely new problem.

There is also the problem of lethargy. The portal is supposed to deliver “on-demand” transformation to your enterprise and help you respond more quickly to new business requirements. But what happens when you line up an entire organization behind a single deployment process? It’s like waiting to ride a roller coaster at Six Flags on a sunny summer afternoon. By the time you actually get your seat, you’ve already wasted a great portion of your day at the park – aside from being severely dehydrated.

Then there is the problem of variety amongst developers and their unwavering love for the particular technology they use. In one division, you have the Java guys. Since most of the enterprise-class platforms are based on Java, these guys often hold the keys to the kingdom – or at least they think they do or think they should. You also have the mainframe bunch. Their apps, old as they may be, still form the mission-critical heart of many organizations. There are ColdFusion, ASP, and .NET developers and all their various applications serving a variety of needs from ‘rogue’ servers tucked inconspicuously under desks and in storage closets. And then there are ‘the new kids on the block’ – the youngest new group of web savvy, open source users who’ve mastered Web 2.0 and who dig things like PHP. None are less or more than the others. They are just different and these differences often make it difficult to get them on the same page – especially if that page is not based on just a few common standards they all understand such as HTML, JavaScript, and CSS. Which brings me to my point.

This is all about the need to share information and collaborate amongst employees, with business partners, and with customers. The two things we all share are the browser and the Net. That is why technologies like Gadgets and OpenSocial are so appealing now. They seek to unify us where we are common – on the web page where just a few simple standards are well excepted. They embrace our differences by responding to any back-end technology that can ultimately serve an HTTP response. They provide a new means to integrate application functionality and data at the front-end without as much reliance on changes in the back-end. They can also extend the reach of our information into new applications on the Web while improving our ability to pull data and features from those apps into our own.

While all of this is naturally maturing in the open domain of the World Wide Web, it has enormous potential behind the firewall. Atlassian Software, for example, has embraced the paradigm in their products (Atlassian + OpenSocial). They’ve made it possible to build a dashboard incorporating gadgets from Confluence, JIRA, Bamboo, Crucible, and external sources. Those same gadgets can also be deployed to other applications such as iGoogle, Google Desktop, and GMail. IBM has also embraced the paradigm by extending support for Google Gadgets in WebSphere Portal 6. Support is huge on the Web, and growing fast within the firewall.

This doesn’t necessarily mean that the enterprise portal platform is really dying. But if I had my choice today, I would at least think twice before writing another fat portlet on JSR 168 with JSF. When designing new applications, we must always ask the questions, “How can I make this investment usable and useful by and for more than just this one app? How can I make this information more open and accessible across the entire enterprise – across enterprises? How can I be sure I’m not just building another information silo?” With technologies like Google Gadgets, OpenSocial, and Apache Shindig, we now have fresh new paradigms to consider.

\n","modified":"2021-09-29T18:11:30.611Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","ogImage":"","subtitle":""},{"_id":"list-ibm-db2-commands","title":"List IBM DB2 Commands","description":"Get a quick list of IBM DB2 commands.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-ibm.svg","created":"2009-03-29T00:00:00.000Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"body":"

Did you know that you can get a quick list of db2 commands by typing “db2 ?” on the command line?

$\"\"$

Following are the DB2 commands from the screen-shot in a form that you can copy and paste:

\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

ACTIVATE DATABASE	GET CONTACTS	RECOVER
ADD CONTACT	GET/UPDATE DB CFG	REDISTRIBUTE DB PARTITION
ADD CONTACTGROUP	GET/UPDATE DBM CFG	REFRESH LDAP
ADD DATALINKS MANAGER	GET DBM MONITOR SWITCHES	REGISTER LDAP
ADD DBPARTITIONNUM	GET DESCRIPTION FOR HEALTH	REGISTER XMLSCHEMA
ADD XMLSCHEMA	GET NOTIFICATION LIST	REGISTER XSROBJECT
ARCHIVE LOG	GET HEALTH SNAPSHOT	REORG INDEXES/TABLE
ATTACH	GET INSTANCE	REORGCHK
AUTOCONFIGURE	GET MONITOR SWITCHES	RESET ADMIN CFG
BACKUP DATABASE	GET RECOMMENDATIONS	RESET ALERT CFG
BIND	GET ROUTINE	RESET DB CFG
CATALOG APPC NODE	GET SNAPSHOT	RESET DBM CFG
CATALOG APPN NODE	HELP	RESET MONITOR
CATALOG DATABASE	HISTORY	RESTART DATABASE
CATALOG DCS DATABASE	IMPORT	RESTORE DATABASE
CATALOG LDAP DATABASE	INITIALIZE TAPE	REWIND TAPE
CATALOG LDAP NODE	INSPECT	ROLLFORWARD DATABASE
CATALOG LOCAL NODE	LIST ACTIVE DATABASES	RUNCMD
CATALOG NPIPE NODE	LIST APPLICATIONS	RUNSTATS
CATALOG NETBIOS NODE	LIST COMMAND OPTIONS	SET CLIENT
CATALOG ODBC DATA SOURCE	LIST DATABASE DIRECTORY	SET RUNTIME DEGREE
CATALOG TCPIP NODE	LIST DB PARTITION GROUPS	SET TABLESPACE CONTAINERS
CHANGE DATABASE COMMENT	LIST DATALINKS MANAGERS	SET TAPE POSITION
CHANGE ISOLATION LEVEL	LIST DBPARTITIONNUMS	SET UTIL_IMPACT_PRIORITY
COMPLETE XMLSCHEMA	LIST DCS APPLICATIONS	SET WRITE
CREATE DATABASE	LIST DCS DIRECTORY	START DATABASE MANAGER
CREATE TOOLS CATALOG	LIST DRDA INDOUBT	START HADR
DEACTIVATE DATABASE	LIST HISTORY	STOP DATABASE MANAGER
DECOMPOSE XML DOCUMENT	LIST INDOUBT TRANSACTIONS	STOP HADR
DEREGISTER	LIST NODE DIRECTORY	TAKEOVER
DESCRIBE	LIST ODBC DATA SOURCES	TERMINATE
DETACH	LIST PACKAGES/TABLES	UNCATALOG DATABASE
DROP CONTACT	LIST TABLESPACE CONTAINERS	UNCATALOG DCS DATABASE
DROP CONTACTGROUP	LIST TABLESPACES	UNCATALOG LDAP DATABASE
DROP DATABASE	LIST UTILITIES	UNCATALOG LDAP NODE
DROP DATALINKS MANAGER	LOAD	UNCATALOG NODE
DROP DBPARTITIONNUM	LOAD QUERY	UNCATALOG ODBC DATA
DROP TOOLS CATALOG	MIGRATE DATABASE	UNQUIESCE DATABASE
ECHO	PING	UNQUIESCE INSTANCE
EDIT	PREP/PRECOMPILE	UPDATE ALERT CFG
EXPORT	PRUNE HISTORY/LOGFILE	UPDATE COMMAND OPTIONS
FORCE APPLICATION	PUT ROUTINE	UPDATE CONTACT
GET/UPDATE ADMIN CFG	QUERY CLIENT	UPDATE CONTACTGROUP
GET ALERT CFG	QUIESCE DATABASE	UPDATE NOTIFICATION LIST
GET AUTHORIZATIONS	QUIESCE INSTANCE	UPDATE HISTORY
GET/UPDATE CLI CFG	QUIESCE TABLESPACES	UPDATE LDAP NODE
GET CONNECTION STATE	QUIT	UPDATE MONITOR SWITCHES
GET CONTACTGROUP	REBIND	XQUERY
GET CONTACTGROUPS	RECONCILE

","modified":"2021-06-01T04:42:42.726Z","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"java-system-properties","title":"Java System Properties","description":"A list of the system properties that can be accessed in Java code with System.getProperty","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/logo-java.svg","created":"2008-10-29T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-06-01T04:49:56.500Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Following are a list of the standard system properties which can be accessed in Java code by using the System.getProperty methods. For example…

\n\n System.getProperty(\"path.separator\");\n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n

Property Name	Description	Java Version
`file.encoding`	The character encoding for the default locale	1.1
`file.encoding.pkg`	The package that contains the converters that handle converting between local encodings and Unicode	1.1
`file.separator`	The platform-dependent file separator (e.g., “/” on UNIX, “\\” for Windows)	1.0
`java.class.path`	The value of the CLASSPATH environment variable	1.0
`java.class.version`	The version of the Java API	1.0
`java.compiler`	The just-in-time compiler to use, if any. The java interpreter provided with the JDK initializes this property from the environment variable JAVA_COMPILER.	1.0
`java.home`	The directory in which Java is installed	1.0
`java.io.tmpdir`	The directory in which java should create temporary files	1.2
`java.version`	The version of the Java interpreter	1.0
`java.vendor`	A vendor-specific string	1.0
`java.vendor.url`	A vendor URL	1.0
`line.separator`	The platform-dependent line separator (e.g., “\\n” on UNIX, “\\r\\n” for Windows)	1.0
`os.name`	The name of the operating system	1.0
`os.arch`	The system architecture	1.0
`os.version`	The operating system version	1.0
`path.separator`	The platform-dependent path separator (e.g., “:” on UNIX, “,” for Windows)	1.0
`user.dir`	The current working directory when the properties were initialized	1.0
`user.home`	The home directory of the current user	1.0
`user.language`	The two-letter language code of the default locale	1.1
`user.name`	The username of the current user	1.0
`user.region`	The two-letter country code of the default locale	1.1
`user.timezone`	The default time zone	1.1

","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""},{"_id":"access-was-console-from-hcl-portal","title":"Access the WAS Console From HCL Portal Server","description":"Up to Portal version 5.1, you could not access the WebSphere Application Server administration console from Portal, but now you can. Here's how.","thumbnail":"https://s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/codyburleson.com/images/2018/07/DManager150x150.png","published":"2012-08-08T00:00:00.000Z","modified":"2021-06-01T04:50:12.154Z","topics":["software-dev"],"menus":["blog"],"features":["syntax highlighter"],"body":"

Up to Portal version 5.1, you could not access the WebSphere\n\t\t\tApplication Server administration console from Portal. You had to have your WAS server running\n\t\t\tseparately. Now, you no longer have to have WAS running separately and you can access the WAS console\n\t\t\tdirectly from the Portal Server. Following is a URL you can try, which might work:

\n\t\t

https://<host>:10032/ibm/console

\n\n\t\t

You might also try the following URL, which is what I've been using with a Docker/Kubernetes image from HCL:

\n\n\t\t

https://<host>:10041/ibm/console

\n\n\t\t

In some installations, ports may differ. To find your WAS admin console port, you can check\n\t\t\tyour serverindex.xml file.

\n\t\t

On my local development environment (Docker container), that file is located\n\t\t\tat: /opt/HCL/wp_profile/config/cells/dockerCell/nodes/dockerNode/serverindex.xml.

\n\t\t

In that file, you might try looking for endPointName="WC_adminhost" or endPointName="WC_adminhost_secure".\n\t\t\tFor example, in my development environment, I found the following, which confirms port 10041, but in\n\t\t\tyour environment, you may find a different value there to use:

\n\n\n

\n<specialEndpoints xmi:id="NamedEndPoint_1607793695380" endPointName="WC_adminhost_secure">\n\t<endPoint xmi:id="EndPoint_1607793695380" host="*" port="10041"/>\n</specialEndpoints>\n

\n","path":["blog"],"layoutName":"SidebarRight","subtitle":""}]

Topic: Software Dev